blob: 6603c26d96b5597a90161ba1d87174354e65696a [file] [log] [blame]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001/* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4:
2 *
3 * VIM - Vi IMproved by Bram Moolenaar
4 *
5 * Do ":help uganda" in Vim to read copying and usage conditions.
6 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed.
7 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code.
8 */
9
10/*
11 * misc1.c: functions that didn't seem to fit elsewhere
12 */
13
14#include "vim.h"
15#include "version.h"
16
17#ifdef HAVE_FCNTL_H
18# include <fcntl.h> /* for chdir() */
19#endif
20
21static char_u *vim_version_dir __ARGS((char_u *vimdir));
22static char_u *remove_tail __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *name));
23#if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
24static char_u *remove_tail_with_ext __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *ext));
25#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000026static int copy_indent __ARGS((int size, char_u *src));
27
28/*
29 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in the current line.
30 */
31 int
32get_indent()
33{
34 return get_indent_str(ml_get_curline(), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
35}
36
37/*
38 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum".
39 */
40 int
41get_indent_lnum(lnum)
42 linenr_T lnum;
43{
44 return get_indent_str(ml_get(lnum), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
45}
46
47#if defined(FEAT_FOLDING) || defined(PROTO)
48/*
49 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum" of buffer
50 * "buf".
51 */
52 int
53get_indent_buf(buf, lnum)
54 buf_T *buf;
55 linenr_T lnum;
56{
57 return get_indent_str(ml_get_buf(buf, lnum, FALSE), (int)buf->b_p_ts);
58}
59#endif
60
61/*
62 * count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "ptr", with
63 * 'tabstop' at "ts"
64 */
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +000065 int
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000066get_indent_str(ptr, ts)
67 char_u *ptr;
68 int ts;
69{
70 int count = 0;
71
72 for ( ; *ptr; ++ptr)
73 {
74 if (*ptr == TAB) /* count a tab for what it is worth */
75 count += ts - (count % ts);
76 else if (*ptr == ' ')
77 ++count; /* count a space for one */
78 else
79 break;
80 }
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +000081 return count;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000082}
83
84/*
85 * Set the indent of the current line.
86 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
87 * Caller must take care of undo.
88 * "flags":
89 * SIN_CHANGED: call changed_bytes() if the line was changed.
90 * SIN_INSERT: insert the indent in front of the line.
91 * SIN_UNDO: save line for undo before changing it.
92 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
93 */
94 int
95set_indent(size, flags)
96 int size;
97 int flags;
98{
99 char_u *p;
100 char_u *newline;
101 char_u *oldline;
102 char_u *s;
103 int todo;
104 int ind_len;
105 int line_len;
106 int doit = FALSE;
107 int ind_done;
108 int tab_pad;
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000109 int retval = FALSE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000110
111 /*
112 * First check if there is anything to do and compute the number of
113 * characters needed for the indent.
114 */
115 todo = size;
116 ind_len = 0;
117 p = oldline = ml_get_curline();
118
119 /* Calculate the buffer size for the new indent, and check to see if it
120 * isn't already set */
121
122 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
123 if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
124 {
125 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
126 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
127 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
128 {
129 ind_done = 0;
130
131 /* count as many characters as we can use */
132 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
133 {
134 if (*p == TAB)
135 {
136 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
137 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
138 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
139 if (todo < tab_pad)
140 break;
141 todo -= tab_pad;
142 ++ind_len;
143 ind_done += tab_pad;
144 }
145 else
146 {
147 --todo;
148 ++ind_len;
149 ++ind_done;
150 }
151 ++p;
152 }
153
154 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
155 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
156 if (todo >= tab_pad)
157 {
158 doit = TRUE;
159 todo -= tab_pad;
160 ++ind_len;
161 /* ind_done += tab_pad; */
162 }
163 }
164
165 /* count tabs required for indent */
166 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
167 {
168 if (*p != TAB)
169 doit = TRUE;
170 else
171 ++p;
172 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
173 ++ind_len;
174 /* ind_done += (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; */
175 }
176 }
177 /* count spaces required for indent */
178 while (todo > 0)
179 {
180 if (*p != ' ')
181 doit = TRUE;
182 else
183 ++p;
184 --todo;
185 ++ind_len;
186 /* ++ind_done; */
187 }
188
189 /* Return if the indent is OK already. */
190 if (!doit && !vim_iswhite(*p) && !(flags & SIN_INSERT))
191 return FALSE;
192
193 /* Allocate memory for the new line. */
194 if (flags & SIN_INSERT)
195 p = oldline;
196 else
197 p = skipwhite(p);
198 line_len = (int)STRLEN(p) + 1;
199 newline = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
200 if (newline == NULL)
201 return FALSE;
202
203 /* Put the characters in the new line. */
204 s = newline;
205 todo = size;
206 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
207 if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
208 {
209 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
210 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
211 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
212 {
213 p = oldline;
214 ind_done = 0;
215
216 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
217 {
218 if (*p == TAB)
219 {
220 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
221 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
222 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
223 if (todo < tab_pad)
224 break;
225 todo -= tab_pad;
226 ind_done += tab_pad;
227 }
228 else
229 {
230 --todo;
231 ++ind_done;
232 }
233 *s++ = *p++;
234 }
235
236 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
237 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
238 if (todo >= tab_pad)
239 {
240 *s++ = TAB;
241 todo -= tab_pad;
242 }
243
244 p = skipwhite(p);
245 }
246
247 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
248 {
249 *s++ = TAB;
250 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
251 }
252 }
253 while (todo > 0)
254 {
255 *s++ = ' ';
256 --todo;
257 }
258 mch_memmove(s, p, (size_t)line_len);
259
260 /* Replace the line (unless undo fails). */
261 if (!(flags & SIN_UNDO) || u_savesub(curwin->w_cursor.lnum) == OK)
262 {
263 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, newline, FALSE);
264 if (flags & SIN_CHANGED)
265 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
266 /* Correct saved cursor position if it's after the indent. */
267 if (saved_cursor.lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum
268 && saved_cursor.col >= (colnr_T)(p - oldline))
269 saved_cursor.col += ind_len - (p - oldline);
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000270 retval = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000271 }
272 else
273 vim_free(newline);
274
275 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000276 return retval;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000277}
278
279/*
280 * Copy the indent from ptr to the current line (and fill to size)
281 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
282 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
283 */
284 static int
285copy_indent(size, src)
286 int size;
287 char_u *src;
288{
289 char_u *p = NULL;
290 char_u *line = NULL;
291 char_u *s;
292 int todo;
293 int ind_len;
294 int line_len = 0;
295 int tab_pad;
296 int ind_done;
297 int round;
298
299 /* Round 1: compute the number of characters needed for the indent
300 * Round 2: copy the characters. */
301 for (round = 1; round <= 2; ++round)
302 {
303 todo = size;
304 ind_len = 0;
305 ind_done = 0;
306 s = src;
307
308 /* Count/copy the usable portion of the source line */
309 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*s))
310 {
311 if (*s == TAB)
312 {
313 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
314 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
315 /* Stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
316 if (todo < tab_pad)
317 break;
318 todo -= tab_pad;
319 ind_done += tab_pad;
320 }
321 else
322 {
323 --todo;
324 ++ind_done;
325 }
326 ++ind_len;
327 if (round == 2)
328 *p++ = *s;
329 ++s;
330 }
331
332 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
333 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
334 if (todo >= tab_pad)
335 {
336 todo -= tab_pad;
337 ++ind_len;
338 if (round == 2)
339 *p++ = TAB;
340 }
341
342 /* Add tabs required for indent */
343 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
344 {
345 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
346 ++ind_len;
347 if (round == 2)
348 *p++ = TAB;
349 }
350
351 /* Count/add spaces required for indent */
352 while (todo > 0)
353 {
354 --todo;
355 ++ind_len;
356 if (round == 2)
357 *p++ = ' ';
358 }
359
360 if (round == 1)
361 {
362 /* Allocate memory for the result: the copied indent, new indent
363 * and the rest of the line. */
364 line_len = (int)STRLEN(ml_get_curline()) + 1;
365 line = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
366 if (line == NULL)
367 return FALSE;
368 p = line;
369 }
370 }
371
372 /* Append the original line */
373 mch_memmove(p, ml_get_curline(), (size_t)line_len);
374
375 /* Replace the line */
376 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, line, FALSE);
377
378 /* Put the cursor after the indent. */
379 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
380 return TRUE;
381}
382
383/*
384 * Return the indent of the current line after a number. Return -1 if no
385 * number was found. Used for 'n' in 'formatoptions': numbered list.
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000386 * Since a pattern is used it can actually handle more than numbers.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000387 */
388 int
389get_number_indent(lnum)
390 linenr_T lnum;
391{
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000392 colnr_T col;
393 pos_T pos;
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000394 regmmatch_T regmatch;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000395
396 if (lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
397 return -1;
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000398 pos.lnum = 0;
399 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(curbuf->b_p_flp, RE_MAGIC);
400 if (regmatch.regprog != NULL)
401 {
402 regmatch.rmm_ic = FALSE;
403 if (vim_regexec_multi(&regmatch, curwin, curbuf, lnum, (colnr_T)0))
404 {
405 pos.lnum = regmatch.endpos[0].lnum + lnum;
406 pos.col = regmatch.endpos[0].col;
407#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
408 pos.coladd = 0;
409#endif
410 }
411 vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
412 }
413
414 if (pos.lnum == 0 || *ml_get_pos(&pos) == NUL)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000415 return -1;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000416 getvcol(curwin, &pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
417 return (int)col;
418}
419
420#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT)
421
422static int cin_is_cinword __ARGS((char_u *line));
423
424/*
425 * Return TRUE if the string "line" starts with a word from 'cinwords'.
426 */
427 static int
428cin_is_cinword(line)
429 char_u *line;
430{
431 char_u *cinw;
432 char_u *cinw_buf;
433 int cinw_len;
434 int retval = FALSE;
435 int len;
436
437 cinw_len = (int)STRLEN(curbuf->b_p_cinw) + 1;
438 cinw_buf = alloc((unsigned)cinw_len);
439 if (cinw_buf != NULL)
440 {
441 line = skipwhite(line);
442 for (cinw = curbuf->b_p_cinw; *cinw; )
443 {
444 len = copy_option_part(&cinw, cinw_buf, cinw_len, ",");
445 if (STRNCMP(line, cinw_buf, len) == 0
446 && (!vim_iswordc(line[len]) || !vim_iswordc(line[len - 1])))
447 {
448 retval = TRUE;
449 break;
450 }
451 }
452 vim_free(cinw_buf);
453 }
454 return retval;
455}
456#endif
457
458/*
459 * open_line: Add a new line below or above the current line.
460 *
461 * For VREPLACE mode, we only add a new line when we get to the end of the
462 * file, otherwise we just start replacing the next line.
463 *
464 * Caller must take care of undo. Since VREPLACE may affect any number of
465 * lines however, it may call u_save_cursor() again when starting to change a
466 * new line.
467 * "flags": OPENLINE_DELSPACES delete spaces after cursor
468 * OPENLINE_DO_COM format comments
469 * OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL keep trailing spaces
470 * OPENLINE_MARKFIX adjust mark positions after the line break
471 *
472 * Return TRUE for success, FALSE for failure
473 */
474 int
475open_line(dir, flags, old_indent)
476 int dir; /* FORWARD or BACKWARD */
477 int flags;
478 int old_indent; /* indent for after ^^D in Insert mode */
479{
480 char_u *saved_line; /* copy of the original line */
481 char_u *next_line = NULL; /* copy of the next line */
482 char_u *p_extra = NULL; /* what goes to next line */
483 int less_cols = 0; /* less columns for mark in new line */
484 int less_cols_off = 0; /* columns to skip for mark adjust */
485 pos_T old_cursor; /* old cursor position */
486 int newcol = 0; /* new cursor column */
487 int newindent = 0; /* auto-indent of the new line */
488 int n;
489 int trunc_line = FALSE; /* truncate current line afterwards */
490 int retval = FALSE; /* return value, default is FAIL */
491#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
492 int extra_len = 0; /* length of p_extra string */
493 int lead_len; /* length of comment leader */
494 char_u *lead_flags; /* position in 'comments' for comment leader */
495 char_u *leader = NULL; /* copy of comment leader */
496#endif
497 char_u *allocated = NULL; /* allocated memory */
498#if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_LISP) \
499 || defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
500 char_u *p;
501#endif
502 int saved_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */
503#if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
504 pos_T *pos;
505#endif
506#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
507 int do_si = (!p_paste && curbuf->b_p_si
508# ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
509 && !curbuf->b_p_cin
510# endif
511 );
512 int no_si = FALSE; /* reset did_si afterwards */
513 int first_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */
514#endif
515#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
516 int vreplace_mode;
517#endif
518 int did_append; /* appended a new line */
519 int saved_pi = curbuf->b_p_pi; /* copy of preserveindent setting */
520
521 /*
522 * make a copy of the current line so we can mess with it
523 */
524 saved_line = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
525 if (saved_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */
526 return FALSE;
527
528#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
529 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
530 {
531 /*
532 * With VREPLACE we make a copy of the next line, which we will be
533 * starting to replace. First make the new line empty and let vim play
534 * with the indenting and comment leader to its heart's content. Then
535 * we grab what it ended up putting on the new line, put back the
536 * original line, and call ins_char() to put each new character onto
537 * the line, replacing what was there before and pushing the right
538 * stuff onto the replace stack. -- webb.
539 */
540 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum < orig_line_count)
541 next_line = vim_strsave(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1));
542 else
543 next_line = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
544 if (next_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */
545 goto theend;
546
547 /*
548 * In VREPLACE mode, a NL replaces the rest of the line, and starts
549 * replacing the next line, so push all of the characters left on the
550 * line onto the replace stack. We'll push any other characters that
551 * might be replaced at the start of the next line (due to autoindent
552 * etc) a bit later.
553 */
554 replace_push(NUL); /* Call twice because BS over NL expects it */
555 replace_push(NUL);
556 p = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
557 while (*p != NUL)
558 replace_push(*p++);
559 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
560 }
561#endif
562
563 if ((State & INSERT)
564#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
565 && !(State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
566#endif
567 )
568 {
569 p_extra = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
570#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
571 if (do_si) /* need first char after new line break */
572 {
573 p = skipwhite(p_extra);
574 first_char = *p;
575 }
576#endif
577#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
578 extra_len = (int)STRLEN(p_extra);
579#endif
580 saved_char = *p_extra;
581 *p_extra = NUL;
582 }
583
584 u_clearline(); /* cannot do "U" command when adding lines */
585#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
586 did_si = FALSE;
587#endif
588 ai_col = 0;
589
590 /*
591 * If we just did an auto-indent, then we didn't type anything on
592 * the prior line, and it should be truncated. Do this even if 'ai' is not
593 * set because automatically inserting a comment leader also sets did_ai.
594 */
595 if (dir == FORWARD && did_ai)
596 trunc_line = TRUE;
597
598 /*
599 * If 'autoindent' and/or 'smartindent' is set, try to figure out what
600 * indent to use for the new line.
601 */
602 if (curbuf->b_p_ai
603#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
604 || do_si
605#endif
606 )
607 {
608 /*
609 * count white space on current line
610 */
611 newindent = get_indent_str(saved_line, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
612 if (newindent == 0)
613 newindent = old_indent; /* for ^^D command in insert mode */
614
615#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
616 /*
617 * Do smart indenting.
618 * In insert/replace mode (only when dir == FORWARD)
619 * we may move some text to the next line. If it starts with '{'
620 * don't add an indent. Fixes inserting a NL before '{' in line
621 * "if (condition) {"
622 */
623 if (!trunc_line && do_si && *saved_line != NUL
624 && (p_extra == NULL || first_char != '{'))
625 {
626 char_u *ptr;
627 char_u last_char;
628
629 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
630 ptr = saved_line;
631# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
632 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
633 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
634 else
635 lead_len = 0;
636# endif
637 if (dir == FORWARD)
638 {
639 /*
640 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
641 * recognised as comments.
642 */
643 if (
644# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
645 lead_len == 0 &&
646# endif
647 ptr[0] == '#')
648 {
649 while (ptr[0] == '#' && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
650 ptr = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
651 newindent = get_indent();
652 }
653# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
654 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
655 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
656 else
657 lead_len = 0;
658 if (lead_len > 0)
659 {
660 /*
661 * This case gets the following right:
662 * \*
663 * * A comment (read '\' as '/').
664 * *\
665 * #define IN_THE_WAY
666 * This should line up here;
667 */
668 p = skipwhite(ptr);
669 if (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '*')
670 p++;
671 if (p[0] == '*')
672 {
673 for (p++; *p; p++)
674 {
675 if (p[0] == '/' && p[-1] == '*')
676 {
677 /*
678 * End of C comment, indent should line up
679 * with the line containing the start of
680 * the comment
681 */
682 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
683 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
684 {
685 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
686 newindent = get_indent();
687 }
688 }
689 }
690 }
691 }
692 else /* Not a comment line */
693# endif
694 {
695 /* Find last non-blank in line */
696 p = ptr + STRLEN(ptr) - 1;
697 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
698 --p;
699 last_char = *p;
700
701 /*
702 * find the character just before the '{' or ';'
703 */
704 if (last_char == '{' || last_char == ';')
705 {
706 if (p > ptr)
707 --p;
708 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
709 --p;
710 }
711 /*
712 * Try to catch lines that are split over multiple
713 * lines. eg:
714 * if (condition &&
715 * condition) {
716 * Should line up here!
717 * }
718 */
719 if (*p == ')')
720 {
721 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
722 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) != NULL)
723 {
724 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
725 newindent = get_indent();
726 ptr = ml_get_curline();
727 }
728 }
729 /*
730 * If last character is '{' do indent, without
731 * checking for "if" and the like.
732 */
733 if (last_char == '{')
734 {
735 did_si = TRUE; /* do indent */
736 no_si = TRUE; /* don't delete it when '{' typed */
737 }
738 /*
739 * Look for "if" and the like, use 'cinwords'.
740 * Don't do this if the previous line ended in ';' or
741 * '}'.
742 */
743 else if (last_char != ';' && last_char != '}'
744 && cin_is_cinword(ptr))
745 did_si = TRUE;
746 }
747 }
748 else /* dir == BACKWARD */
749 {
750 /*
751 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
752 * recognised as comments.
753 */
754 if (
755# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
756 lead_len == 0 &&
757# endif
758 ptr[0] == '#')
759 {
760 int was_backslashed = FALSE;
761
762 while ((ptr[0] == '#' || was_backslashed) &&
763 curwin->w_cursor.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
764 {
765 if (*ptr && ptr[STRLEN(ptr) - 1] == '\\')
766 was_backslashed = TRUE;
767 else
768 was_backslashed = FALSE;
769 ptr = ml_get(++curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
770 }
771 if (was_backslashed)
772 newindent = 0; /* Got to end of file */
773 else
774 newindent = get_indent();
775 }
776 p = skipwhite(ptr);
777 if (*p == '}') /* if line starts with '}': do indent */
778 did_si = TRUE;
779 else /* can delete indent when '{' typed */
780 can_si_back = TRUE;
781 }
782 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
783 }
784 if (do_si)
785 can_si = TRUE;
786#endif /* FEAT_SMARTINDENT */
787
788 did_ai = TRUE;
789 }
790
791#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
792 /*
793 * Find out if the current line starts with a comment leader.
794 * This may then be inserted in front of the new line.
795 */
796 end_comment_pending = NUL;
797 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
798 lead_len = get_leader_len(saved_line, &lead_flags, dir == BACKWARD);
799 else
800 lead_len = 0;
801 if (lead_len > 0)
802 {
803 char_u *lead_repl = NULL; /* replaces comment leader */
804 int lead_repl_len = 0; /* length of *lead_repl */
805 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */
806 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */
807 char_u *comment_end = NULL; /* where lead_end has been found */
808 int extra_space = FALSE; /* append extra space */
809 int current_flag;
810 int require_blank = FALSE; /* requires blank after middle */
811 char_u *p2;
812
813 /*
814 * If the comment leader has the start, middle or end flag, it may not
815 * be used or may be replaced with the middle leader.
816 */
817 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
818 {
819 if (*p == COM_BLANK)
820 {
821 require_blank = TRUE;
822 continue;
823 }
824 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
825 {
826 current_flag = *p;
827 if (*p == COM_START)
828 {
829 /*
830 * Doing "O" on a start of comment does not insert leader.
831 */
832 if (dir == BACKWARD)
833 {
834 lead_len = 0;
835 break;
836 }
837
838 /* find start of middle part */
839 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
840 require_blank = FALSE;
841 }
842
843 /*
844 * Isolate the strings of the middle and end leader.
845 */
846 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of middle flags */
847 {
848 if (*p == COM_BLANK)
849 require_blank = TRUE;
850 ++p;
851 }
852 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
853
854 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of end flags */
855 {
856 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
857 if (*p == COM_AUTO_END)
858 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
859 ++p;
860 }
861 n = copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
862
863 if (end_comment_pending == -1) /* we can set it now */
864 end_comment_pending = lead_end[n - 1];
865
866 /*
867 * If the end of the comment is in the same line, don't use
868 * the comment leader.
869 */
870 if (dir == FORWARD)
871 {
872 for (p = saved_line + lead_len; *p; ++p)
873 if (STRNCMP(p, lead_end, n) == 0)
874 {
875 comment_end = p;
876 lead_len = 0;
877 break;
878 }
879 }
880
881 /*
882 * Doing "o" on a start of comment inserts the middle leader.
883 */
884 if (lead_len > 0)
885 {
886 if (current_flag == COM_START)
887 {
888 lead_repl = lead_middle;
889 lead_repl_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
890 }
891
892 /*
893 * If we have hit RETURN immediately after the start
894 * comment leader, then put a space after the middle
895 * comment leader on the next line.
896 */
897 if (!vim_iswhite(saved_line[lead_len - 1])
898 && ((p_extra != NULL
899 && (int)curwin->w_cursor.col == lead_len)
900 || (p_extra == NULL
901 && saved_line[lead_len] == NUL)
902 || require_blank))
903 extra_space = TRUE;
904 }
905 break;
906 }
907 if (*p == COM_END)
908 {
909 /*
910 * Doing "o" on the end of a comment does not insert leader.
911 * Remember where the end is, might want to use it to find the
912 * start (for C-comments).
913 */
914 if (dir == FORWARD)
915 {
916 comment_end = skipwhite(saved_line);
917 lead_len = 0;
918 break;
919 }
920
921 /*
922 * Doing "O" on the end of a comment inserts the middle leader.
923 * Find the string for the middle leader, searching backwards.
924 */
925 while (p > curbuf->b_p_com && *p != ',')
926 --p;
927 for (lead_repl = p; lead_repl > curbuf->b_p_com
928 && lead_repl[-1] != ':'; --lead_repl)
929 ;
930 lead_repl_len = (int)(p - lead_repl);
931
932 /* We can probably always add an extra space when doing "O" on
933 * the comment-end */
934 extra_space = TRUE;
935
936 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
937 for (p2 = p; *p2 && *p2 != ':'; p2++)
938 {
939 if (*p2 == COM_AUTO_END)
940 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
941 }
942 if (end_comment_pending == -1)
943 {
944 /* Find last character in end-comment string */
945 while (*p2 && *p2 != ',')
946 p2++;
947 end_comment_pending = p2[-1];
948 }
949 break;
950 }
951 if (*p == COM_FIRST)
952 {
953 /*
954 * Comment leader for first line only: Don't repeat leader
955 * when using "O", blank out leader when using "o".
956 */
957 if (dir == BACKWARD)
958 lead_len = 0;
959 else
960 {
961 lead_repl = (char_u *)"";
962 lead_repl_len = 0;
963 }
964 break;
965 }
966 }
967 if (lead_len)
968 {
969 /* allocate buffer (may concatenate p_exta later) */
970 leader = alloc(lead_len + lead_repl_len + extra_space +
971 extra_len + 1);
972 allocated = leader; /* remember to free it later */
973
974 if (leader == NULL)
975 lead_len = 0;
976 else
977 {
978 STRNCPY(leader, saved_line, lead_len);
979 leader[lead_len] = NUL;
980
981 /*
982 * Replace leader with lead_repl, right or left adjusted
983 */
984 if (lead_repl != NULL)
985 {
986 int c = 0;
987 int off = 0;
988
989 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
990 {
991 if (*p == COM_RIGHT || *p == COM_LEFT)
992 c = *p;
993 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
994 off = getdigits(&p);
995 }
996 if (c == COM_RIGHT) /* right adjusted leader */
997 {
998 /* find last non-white in the leader to line up with */
999 for (p = leader + lead_len - 1; p > leader
1000 && vim_iswhite(*p); --p)
1001 ;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001002 ++p;
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001003
1004#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1005 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1006 * screen characters, not bytes. */
1007 {
1008 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1009 lead_repl_len);
1010 int old_size = 0;
1011 char_u *endp = p;
1012 int l;
1013
1014 while (old_size < repl_size && p > leader)
1015 {
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00001016 mb_ptr_back(leader, p);
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001017 old_size += ptr2cells(p);
1018 }
1019 l = lead_repl_len - (endp - p);
1020 if (l != 0)
1021 mch_memmove(endp + l, endp,
1022 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - endp));
1023 lead_len += l;
1024 }
1025#else
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001026 if (p < leader + lead_repl_len)
1027 p = leader;
1028 else
1029 p -= lead_repl_len;
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001030#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001031 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1032 if (p + lead_repl_len > leader + lead_len)
1033 p[lead_repl_len] = NUL;
1034
1035 /* blank-out any other chars from the old leader. */
1036 while (--p >= leader)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001037 {
1038#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1039 int l = mb_head_off(leader, p);
1040
1041 if (l > 1)
1042 {
1043 p -= l;
1044 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1045 {
1046 p[1] = ' ';
1047 --l;
1048 }
1049 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l + 1,
1050 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - (p + l + 1)));
1051 lead_len -= l;
1052 *p = ' ';
1053 }
1054 else
1055#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001056 if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1057 *p = ' ';
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001058 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001059 }
1060 else /* left adjusted leader */
1061 {
1062 p = skipwhite(leader);
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001063#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1064 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1065 * screen characters, not bytes. Move the part that is
1066 * not to be overwritten. */
1067 {
1068 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1069 lead_repl_len);
1070 int i;
1071 int l;
1072
1073 for (i = 0; p[i] != NUL && i < lead_len; i += l)
1074 {
1075 l = mb_ptr2len_check(p + i);
1076 if (vim_strnsize(p, i + l) > repl_size)
1077 break;
1078 }
1079 if (i != lead_repl_len)
1080 {
1081 mch_memmove(p + lead_repl_len, p + i,
1082 (size_t)(lead_len - i - (leader - p)));
1083 lead_len += lead_repl_len - i;
1084 }
1085 }
1086#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001087 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1088
1089 /* Replace any remaining non-white chars in the old
1090 * leader by spaces. Keep Tabs, the indent must
1091 * remain the same. */
1092 for (p += lead_repl_len; p < leader + lead_len; ++p)
1093 if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1094 {
1095 /* Don't put a space before a TAB. */
1096 if (p + 1 < leader + lead_len && p[1] == TAB)
1097 {
1098 --lead_len;
1099 mch_memmove(p, p + 1,
1100 (leader + lead_len) - p);
1101 }
1102 else
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001103 {
1104#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1105 int l = mb_ptr2len_check(p);
1106
1107 if (l > 1)
1108 {
1109 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1110 {
1111 /* Replace a double-wide char with
1112 * two spaces */
1113 --l;
1114 *p++ = ' ';
1115 }
1116 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l,
1117 (leader + lead_len) - p);
1118 lead_len -= l - 1;
1119 }
1120#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001121 *p = ' ';
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001122 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001123 }
1124 *p = NUL;
1125 }
1126
1127 /* Recompute the indent, it may have changed. */
1128 if (curbuf->b_p_ai
1129#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1130 || do_si
1131#endif
1132 )
1133 newindent = get_indent_str(leader, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
1134
1135 /* Add the indent offset */
1136 if (newindent + off < 0)
1137 {
1138 off = -newindent;
1139 newindent = 0;
1140 }
1141 else
1142 newindent += off;
1143
1144 /* Correct trailing spaces for the shift, so that
1145 * alignment remains equal. */
1146 while (off > 0 && lead_len > 0
1147 && leader[lead_len - 1] == ' ')
1148 {
1149 /* Don't do it when there is a tab before the space */
1150 if (vim_strchr(skipwhite(leader), '\t') != NULL)
1151 break;
1152 --lead_len;
1153 --off;
1154 }
1155
1156 /* If the leader ends in white space, don't add an
1157 * extra space */
1158 if (lead_len > 0 && vim_iswhite(leader[lead_len - 1]))
1159 extra_space = FALSE;
1160 leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1161 }
1162
1163 if (extra_space)
1164 {
1165 leader[lead_len++] = ' ';
1166 leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1167 }
1168
1169 newcol = lead_len;
1170
1171 /*
1172 * if a new indent will be set below, remove the indent that
1173 * is in the comment leader
1174 */
1175 if (newindent
1176#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1177 || did_si
1178#endif
1179 )
1180 {
1181 while (lead_len && vim_iswhite(*leader))
1182 {
1183 --lead_len;
1184 --newcol;
1185 ++leader;
1186 }
1187 }
1188
1189 }
1190#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1191 did_si = can_si = FALSE;
1192#endif
1193 }
1194 else if (comment_end != NULL)
1195 {
1196 /*
1197 * We have finished a comment, so we don't use the leader.
1198 * If this was a C-comment and 'ai' or 'si' is set do a normal
1199 * indent to align with the line containing the start of the
1200 * comment.
1201 */
1202 if (comment_end[0] == '*' && comment_end[1] == '/' &&
1203 (curbuf->b_p_ai
1204#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1205 || do_si
1206#endif
1207 ))
1208 {
1209 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1210 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(comment_end - saved_line);
1211 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
1212 {
1213 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
1214 newindent = get_indent();
1215 }
1216 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1217 }
1218 }
1219 }
1220#endif
1221
1222 /* (State == INSERT || State == REPLACE), only when dir == FORWARD */
1223 if (p_extra != NULL)
1224 {
1225 *p_extra = saved_char; /* restore char that NUL replaced */
1226
1227 /*
1228 * When 'ai' set or "flags" has OPENLINE_DELSPACES, skip to the first
1229 * non-blank.
1230 *
1231 * When in REPLACE mode, put the deleted blanks on the replace stack,
1232 * preceded by a NUL, so they can be put back when a BS is entered.
1233 */
1234 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1235 replace_push(NUL); /* end of extra blanks */
1236 if (curbuf->b_p_ai || (flags & OPENLINE_DELSPACES))
1237 {
1238 while ((*p_extra == ' ' || *p_extra == '\t')
1239#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1240 && (!enc_utf8
1241 || !utf_iscomposing(utf_ptr2char(p_extra + 1)))
1242#endif
1243 )
1244 {
1245 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1246 replace_push(*p_extra);
1247 ++p_extra;
1248 ++less_cols_off;
1249 }
1250 }
1251 if (*p_extra != NUL)
1252 did_ai = FALSE; /* append some text, don't truncate now */
1253
1254 /* columns for marks adjusted for removed columns */
1255 less_cols = (int)(p_extra - saved_line);
1256 }
1257
1258 if (p_extra == NULL)
1259 p_extra = (char_u *)""; /* append empty line */
1260
1261#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1262 /* concatenate leader and p_extra, if there is a leader */
1263 if (lead_len)
1264 {
1265 STRCAT(leader, p_extra);
1266 p_extra = leader;
1267 did_ai = TRUE; /* So truncating blanks works with comments */
1268 less_cols -= lead_len;
1269 }
1270 else
1271 end_comment_pending = NUL; /* turns out there was no leader */
1272#endif
1273
1274 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1275 if (dir == BACKWARD)
1276 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1277#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1278 if (!(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) || old_cursor.lnum >= orig_line_count)
1279#endif
1280 {
1281 if (ml_append(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, (colnr_T)0, FALSE)
1282 == FAIL)
1283 goto theend;
1284 /* Postpone calling changed_lines(), because it would mess up folding
1285 * with markers. */
1286 mark_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, 1L, 0L);
1287 did_append = TRUE;
1288 }
1289#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1290 else
1291 {
1292 /*
1293 * In VREPLACE mode we are starting to replace the next line.
1294 */
1295 curwin->w_cursor.lnum++;
1296 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= Insstart.lnum + vr_lines_changed)
1297 {
1298 /* In case we NL to a new line, BS to the previous one, and NL
1299 * again, we don't want to save the new line for undo twice.
1300 */
1301 (void)u_save_cursor(); /* errors are ignored! */
1302 vr_lines_changed++;
1303 }
1304 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, TRUE);
1305 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
1306 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
1307 did_append = FALSE;
1308 }
1309#endif
1310
1311 if (newindent
1312#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1313 || did_si
1314#endif
1315 )
1316 {
1317 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1318#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1319 if (did_si)
1320 {
1321 if (p_sr)
1322 newindent -= newindent % (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1323 newindent += (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1324 }
1325#endif
1326 /* Copy the indent only if expand tab is disabled */
1327 if (curbuf->b_p_ci && !curbuf->b_p_et)
1328 {
1329 (void)copy_indent(newindent, saved_line);
1330
1331 /*
1332 * Set the 'preserveindent' option so that any further screwing
1333 * with the line doesn't entirely destroy our efforts to preserve
1334 * it. It gets restored at the function end.
1335 */
1336 curbuf->b_p_pi = TRUE;
1337 }
1338 else
1339 (void)set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT);
1340 less_cols -= curwin->w_cursor.col;
1341
1342 ai_col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1343
1344 /*
1345 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the new indent, there must
1346 * be a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS
1347 */
1348 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1349 for (n = 0; n < (int)curwin->w_cursor.col; ++n)
1350 replace_push(NUL);
1351 newcol += curwin->w_cursor.col;
1352#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1353 if (no_si)
1354 did_si = FALSE;
1355#endif
1356 }
1357
1358#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1359 /*
1360 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the extra leader, there must be
1361 * a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS.
1362 */
1363 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1364 while (lead_len-- > 0)
1365 replace_push(NUL);
1366#endif
1367
1368 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1369
1370 if (dir == FORWARD)
1371 {
1372 if (trunc_line || (State & INSERT))
1373 {
1374 /* truncate current line at cursor */
1375 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
1376 /* Remove trailing white space, unless OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL used. */
1377 if (trunc_line && !(flags & OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL))
1378 truncate_spaces(saved_line);
1379 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, saved_line, FALSE);
1380 saved_line = NULL;
1381 if (did_append)
1382 {
1383 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col,
1384 curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, 1L);
1385 did_append = FALSE;
1386
1387 /* Move marks after the line break to the new line. */
1388 if (flags & OPENLINE_MARKFIX)
1389 mark_col_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
1390 curwin->w_cursor.col + less_cols_off,
1391 1L, (long)-less_cols);
1392 }
1393 else
1394 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
1395 }
1396
1397 /*
1398 * Put the cursor on the new line. Careful: the scrollup() above may
1399 * have moved w_cursor, we must use old_cursor.
1400 */
1401 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = old_cursor.lnum + 1;
1402 }
1403 if (did_append)
1404 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1L);
1405
1406 curwin->w_cursor.col = newcol;
1407#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1408 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1409#endif
1410
1411#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1412 /*
1413 * In VREPLACE mode, we are handling the replace stack ourselves, so stop
1414 * fixthisline() from doing it (via change_indent()) by telling it we're in
1415 * normal INSERT mode.
1416 */
1417 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1418 {
1419 vreplace_mode = State; /* So we know to put things right later */
1420 State = INSERT;
1421 }
1422 else
1423 vreplace_mode = 0;
1424#endif
1425#ifdef FEAT_LISP
1426 /*
1427 * May do lisp indenting.
1428 */
1429 if (!p_paste
1430# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1431 && leader == NULL
1432# endif
1433 && curbuf->b_p_lisp
1434 && curbuf->b_p_ai)
1435 {
1436 fixthisline(get_lisp_indent);
1437 p = ml_get_curline();
1438 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1439 }
1440#endif
1441#ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
1442 /*
1443 * May do indenting after opening a new line.
1444 */
1445 if (!p_paste
1446 && (curbuf->b_p_cin
1447# ifdef FEAT_EVAL
1448 || *curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL
1449# endif
1450 )
1451 && in_cinkeys(dir == FORWARD
1452 ? KEY_OPEN_FORW
1453 : KEY_OPEN_BACK, ' ', linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)))
1454 {
1455 do_c_expr_indent();
1456 p = ml_get_curline();
1457 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1458 }
1459#endif
1460#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1461 if (vreplace_mode != 0)
1462 State = vreplace_mode;
1463#endif
1464
1465#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1466 /*
1467 * Finally, VREPLACE gets the stuff on the new line, then puts back the
1468 * original line, and inserts the new stuff char by char, pushing old stuff
1469 * onto the replace stack (via ins_char()).
1470 */
1471 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1472 {
1473 /* Put new line in p_extra */
1474 p_extra = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
1475 if (p_extra == NULL)
1476 goto theend;
1477
1478 /* Put back original line */
1479 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, next_line, FALSE);
1480
1481 /* Insert new stuff into line again */
1482 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
1483#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1484 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1485#endif
1486 ins_bytes(p_extra); /* will call changed_bytes() */
1487 vim_free(p_extra);
1488 next_line = NULL;
1489 }
1490#endif
1491
1492 retval = TRUE; /* success! */
1493theend:
1494 curbuf->b_p_pi = saved_pi;
1495 vim_free(saved_line);
1496 vim_free(next_line);
1497 vim_free(allocated);
1498 return retval;
1499}
1500
1501#if defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(PROTO)
1502/*
1503 * get_leader_len() returns the length of the prefix of the given string
1504 * which introduces a comment. If this string is not a comment then 0 is
1505 * returned.
1506 * When "flags" is not NULL, it is set to point to the flags of the recognized
1507 * comment leader.
1508 * "backward" must be true for the "O" command.
1509 */
1510 int
1511get_leader_len(line, flags, backward)
1512 char_u *line;
1513 char_u **flags;
1514 int backward;
1515{
1516 int i, j;
1517 int got_com = FALSE;
1518 int found_one;
1519 char_u part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* buffer for one option part */
1520 char_u *string; /* pointer to comment string */
1521 char_u *list;
1522
1523 i = 0;
1524 while (vim_iswhite(line[i])) /* leading white space is ignored */
1525 ++i;
1526
1527 /*
1528 * Repeat to match several nested comment strings.
1529 */
1530 while (line[i])
1531 {
1532 /*
1533 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match
1534 */
1535 found_one = FALSE;
1536 for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; )
1537 {
1538 /*
1539 * Get one option part into part_buf[]. Advance list to next one.
1540 * put string at start of string.
1541 */
1542 if (!got_com && flags != NULL) /* remember where flags started */
1543 *flags = list;
1544 (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
1545 string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':');
1546 if (string == NULL) /* missing ':', ignore this part */
1547 continue;
1548 *string++ = NUL; /* isolate flags from string */
1549
1550 /*
1551 * When already found a nested comment, only accept further
1552 * nested comments.
1553 */
1554 if (got_com && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1555 continue;
1556
1557 /* When 'O' flag used don't use for "O" command */
1558 if (backward && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NOBACK) != NULL)
1559 continue;
1560
1561 /*
1562 * Line contents and string must match.
1563 * When string starts with white space, must have some white space
1564 * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of
1565 * TABs and spaces).
1566 */
1567 if (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1568 {
1569 if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1]))
1570 continue;
1571 while (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1572 ++string;
1573 }
1574 for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j)
1575 ;
1576 if (string[j] != NUL)
1577 continue;
1578
1579 /*
1580 * When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an
1581 * end-of-line after the string in the line.
1582 */
1583 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL
1584 && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL)
1585 continue;
1586
1587 /*
1588 * We have found a match, stop searching.
1589 */
1590 i += j;
1591 got_com = TRUE;
1592 found_one = TRUE;
1593 break;
1594 }
1595
1596 /*
1597 * No match found, stop scanning.
1598 */
1599 if (!found_one)
1600 break;
1601
1602 /*
1603 * Include any trailing white space.
1604 */
1605 while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))
1606 ++i;
1607
1608 /*
1609 * If this comment doesn't nest, stop here.
1610 */
1611 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1612 break;
1613 }
1614 return (got_com ? i : 0);
1615}
1616#endif
1617
1618/*
1619 * Return the number of window lines occupied by buffer line "lnum".
1620 */
1621 int
1622plines(lnum)
1623 linenr_T lnum;
1624{
1625 return plines_win(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1626}
1627
1628 int
1629plines_win(wp, lnum, winheight)
1630 win_T *wp;
1631 linenr_T lnum;
1632 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */
1633{
1634#if defined(FEAT_DIFF) || defined(PROTO)
1635 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result
1636 * is one line anyway. */
1637 return plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) + diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1638}
1639
1640 int
1641plines_nofill(lnum)
1642 linenr_T lnum;
1643{
1644 return plines_win_nofill(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1645}
1646
1647 int
1648plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight)
1649 win_T *wp;
1650 linenr_T lnum;
1651 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */
1652{
1653#endif
1654 int lines;
1655
1656 if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1657 return 1;
1658
1659#ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1660 if (wp->w_width == 0)
1661 return 1;
1662#endif
1663
1664#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1665 /* A folded lines is handled just like an empty line. */
1666 /* NOTE: Caller must handle lines that are MAYBE folded. */
1667 if (lineFolded(wp, lnum) == TRUE)
1668 return 1;
1669#endif
1670
1671 lines = plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum);
1672 if (winheight > 0 && lines > wp->w_height)
1673 return (int)wp->w_height;
1674 return lines;
1675}
1676
1677/*
1678 * Return number of window lines physical line "lnum" will occupy in window
1679 * "wp". Does not care about folding, 'wrap' or 'diff'.
1680 */
1681 int
1682plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum)
1683 win_T *wp;
1684 linenr_T lnum;
1685{
1686 char_u *s;
1687 long col;
1688 int width;
1689
1690 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1691 if (*s == NUL) /* empty line */
1692 return 1;
1693 col = win_linetabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)MAXCOL);
1694
1695 /*
1696 * If list mode is on, then the '$' at the end of the line may take up one
1697 * extra column.
1698 */
1699 if (wp->w_p_list && lcs_eol != NUL)
1700 col += 1;
1701
1702 /*
1703 * Add column offset for 'number' and 'foldcolumn'.
1704 */
1705 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1706 if (width <= 0)
1707 return 32000;
1708 if (col <= width)
1709 return 1;
1710 col -= width;
1711 width += win_col_off2(wp);
1712 return (col + (width - 1)) / width + 1;
1713}
1714
1715/*
1716 * Like plines_win(), but only reports the number of physical screen lines
1717 * used from the start of the line to the given column number.
1718 */
1719 int
1720plines_win_col(wp, lnum, column)
1721 win_T *wp;
1722 linenr_T lnum;
1723 long column;
1724{
1725 long col;
1726 char_u *s;
1727 int lines = 0;
1728 int width;
1729
1730#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1731 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result
1732 * is one line anyway. */
1733 lines = diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1734#endif
1735
1736 if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1737 return lines + 1;
1738
1739#ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1740 if (wp->w_width == 0)
1741 return lines + 1;
1742#endif
1743
1744 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1745
1746 col = 0;
1747 while (*s != NUL && --column >= 0)
1748 {
1749 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL);
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00001750 mb_ptr_adv(s);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001751 }
1752
1753 /*
1754 * If *s is a TAB, and the TAB is not displayed as ^I, and we're not in
1755 * INSERT mode, then col must be adjusted so that it represents the last
1756 * screen position of the TAB. This only fixes an error when the TAB wraps
1757 * from one screen line to the next (when 'columns' is not a multiple of
1758 * 'ts') -- webb.
1759 */
1760 if (*s == TAB && (State & NORMAL) && (!wp->w_p_list || lcs_tab1))
1761 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL) - 1;
1762
1763 /*
1764 * Add column offset for 'number', 'foldcolumn', etc.
1765 */
1766 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1767 if (width > 0)
1768 {
1769 lines += 1;
1770 if (col >= width)
1771 lines += (col - width) / (width + win_col_off2(wp));
1772 if (lines <= wp->w_height)
1773 return lines;
1774 }
1775 return (int)(wp->w_height); /* maximum length */
1776}
1777
1778 int
1779plines_m_win(wp, first, last)
1780 win_T *wp;
1781 linenr_T first, last;
1782{
1783 int count = 0;
1784
1785 while (first <= last)
1786 {
1787#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1788 int x;
1789
1790 /* Check if there are any really folded lines, but also included lines
1791 * that are maybe folded. */
1792 x = foldedCount(wp, first, NULL);
1793 if (x > 0)
1794 {
1795 ++count; /* count 1 for "+-- folded" line */
1796 first += x;
1797 }
1798 else
1799#endif
1800 {
1801#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1802 if (first == wp->w_topline)
1803 count += plines_win_nofill(wp, first, TRUE) + wp->w_topfill;
1804 else
1805#endif
1806 count += plines_win(wp, first, TRUE);
1807 ++first;
1808 }
1809 }
1810 return (count);
1811}
1812
1813#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) || defined(PROTO)
1814/*
1815 * Insert string "p" at the cursor position. Stops at a NUL byte.
1816 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1817 */
1818 void
1819ins_bytes(p)
1820 char_u *p;
1821{
1822 ins_bytes_len(p, (int)STRLEN(p));
1823}
1824#endif
1825
1826#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) \
1827 || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1828/*
1829 * Insert string "p" with length "len" at the cursor position.
1830 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1831 */
1832 void
1833ins_bytes_len(p, len)
1834 char_u *p;
1835 int len;
1836{
1837 int i;
1838# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1839 int n;
1840
1841 for (i = 0; i < len; i += n)
1842 {
1843 n = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p + i);
1844 ins_char_bytes(p + i, n);
1845 }
1846# else
1847 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
1848 ins_char(p[i]);
1849# endif
1850}
1851#endif
1852
1853/*
1854 * Insert or replace a single character at the cursor position.
1855 * When in REPLACE or VREPLACE mode, replace any existing character.
1856 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
1857 * For multi-byte characters we get the whole character, the caller must
1858 * convert bytes to a character.
1859 */
1860 void
1861ins_char(c)
1862 int c;
1863{
1864#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1865 char_u buf[MB_MAXBYTES];
1866 int n;
1867
1868 n = (*mb_char2bytes)(c, buf);
1869
1870 /* When "c" is 0x100, 0x200, etc. we don't want to insert a NUL byte.
1871 * Happens for CTRL-Vu9900. */
1872 if (buf[0] == 0)
1873 buf[0] = '\n';
1874
1875 ins_char_bytes(buf, n);
1876}
1877
1878 void
1879ins_char_bytes(buf, charlen)
1880 char_u *buf;
1881 int charlen;
1882{
1883 int c = buf[0];
1884 int l, j;
1885#endif
1886 int newlen; /* nr of bytes inserted */
1887 int oldlen; /* nr of bytes deleted (0 when not replacing) */
1888 char_u *p;
1889 char_u *newp;
1890 char_u *oldp;
1891 int linelen; /* length of old line including NUL */
1892 colnr_T col;
1893 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1894 int i;
1895
1896#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1897 /* Break tabs if needed. */
1898 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
1899 coladvance_force(getviscol());
1900#endif
1901
1902 col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1903 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
1904 linelen = (int)STRLEN(oldp) + 1;
1905
1906 /* The lengths default to the values for when not replacing. */
1907 oldlen = 0;
1908#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1909 newlen = charlen;
1910#else
1911 newlen = 1;
1912#endif
1913
1914 if (State & REPLACE_FLAG)
1915 {
1916#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1917 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1918 {
1919 colnr_T new_vcol = 0; /* init for GCC */
1920 colnr_T vcol;
1921 int old_list;
1922#ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1923 char_u buf[2];
1924#endif
1925
1926 /*
1927 * Disable 'list' temporarily, unless 'cpo' contains the 'L' flag.
1928 * Returns the old value of list, so when finished,
1929 * curwin->w_p_list should be set back to this.
1930 */
1931 old_list = curwin->w_p_list;
1932 if (old_list && vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISTWM) == NULL)
1933 curwin->w_p_list = FALSE;
1934
1935 /*
1936 * In virtual replace mode each character may replace one or more
1937 * characters (zero if it's a TAB). Count the number of bytes to
1938 * be deleted to make room for the new character, counting screen
1939 * cells. May result in adding spaces to fill a gap.
1940 */
1941 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, NULL, &vcol, NULL);
1942#ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1943 buf[0] = c;
1944 buf[1] = NUL;
1945#endif
1946 new_vcol = vcol + chartabsize(buf, vcol);
1947 while (oldp[col + oldlen] != NUL && vcol < new_vcol)
1948 {
1949 vcol += chartabsize(oldp + col + oldlen, vcol);
1950 /* Don't need to remove a TAB that takes us to the right
1951 * position. */
1952 if (vcol > new_vcol && oldp[col + oldlen] == TAB)
1953 break;
1954#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1955 oldlen += (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col + oldlen);
1956#else
1957 ++oldlen;
1958#endif
1959 /* Deleted a bit too much, insert spaces. */
1960 if (vcol > new_vcol)
1961 newlen += vcol - new_vcol;
1962 }
1963 curwin->w_p_list = old_list;
1964 }
1965 else
1966#endif
1967 if (oldp[col] != NUL)
1968 {
1969 /* normal replace */
1970#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1971 oldlen = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col);
1972#else
1973 oldlen = 1;
1974#endif
1975 }
1976
1977
1978 /* Push the replaced bytes onto the replace stack, so that they can be
1979 * put back when BS is used. The bytes of a multi-byte character are
1980 * done the other way around, so that the first byte is popped off
1981 * first (it tells the byte length of the character). */
1982 replace_push(NUL);
1983 for (i = 0; i < oldlen; ++i)
1984 {
1985#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1986 l = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col + i) - 1;
1987 for (j = l; j >= 0; --j)
1988 replace_push(oldp[col + i + j]);
1989 i += l;
1990#else
1991 replace_push(oldp[col + i]);
1992#endif
1993 }
1994 }
1995
1996 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(linelen + newlen - oldlen));
1997 if (newp == NULL)
1998 return;
1999
2000 /* Copy bytes before the cursor. */
2001 if (col > 0)
2002 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2003
2004 /* Copy bytes after the changed character(s). */
2005 p = newp + col;
2006 mch_memmove(p + newlen, oldp + col + oldlen,
2007 (size_t)(linelen - col - oldlen));
2008
2009 /* Insert or overwrite the new character. */
2010#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2011 mch_memmove(p, buf, charlen);
2012 i = charlen;
2013#else
2014 *p = c;
2015 i = 1;
2016#endif
2017
2018 /* Fill with spaces when necessary. */
2019 while (i < newlen)
2020 p[i++] = ' ';
2021
2022 /* Replace the line in the buffer. */
2023 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2024
2025 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2026 changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2027
2028 /*
2029 * If we're in Insert or Replace mode and 'showmatch' is set, then briefly
2030 * show the match for right parens and braces.
2031 */
2032 if (p_sm && (State & INSERT)
2033 && msg_silent == 0
2034#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2035 && charlen == 1
2036#endif
2037 )
2038 showmatch(c);
2039
2040#ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT
2041 if (!p_ri || (State & REPLACE_FLAG))
2042#endif
2043 {
2044 /* Normal insert: move cursor right */
2045#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2046 curwin->w_cursor.col += charlen;
2047#else
2048 ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
2049#endif
2050 }
2051 /*
2052 * TODO: should try to update w_row here, to avoid recomputing it later.
2053 */
2054}
2055
2056/*
2057 * Insert a string at the cursor position.
2058 * Note: Does NOT handle Replace mode.
2059 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2060 */
2061 void
2062ins_str(s)
2063 char_u *s;
2064{
2065 char_u *oldp, *newp;
2066 int newlen = (int)STRLEN(s);
2067 int oldlen;
2068 colnr_T col;
2069 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2070
2071#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2072 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
2073 coladvance_force(getviscol());
2074#endif
2075
2076 col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2077 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2078 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2079
2080 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(oldlen + newlen + 1));
2081 if (newp == NULL)
2082 return;
2083 if (col > 0)
2084 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2085 mch_memmove(newp + col, s, (size_t)newlen);
2086 mch_memmove(newp + col + newlen, oldp + col, (size_t)(oldlen - col + 1));
2087 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2088 changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2089 curwin->w_cursor.col += newlen;
2090}
2091
2092/*
2093 * Delete one character under the cursor.
2094 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2095 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2096 *
2097 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2098 */
2099 int
2100del_char(fixpos)
2101 int fixpos;
2102{
2103#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2104 if (has_mbyte)
2105 {
2106 /* Make sure the cursor is at the start of a character. */
2107 mb_adjust_cursor();
2108 if (*ml_get_cursor() == NUL)
2109 return FAIL;
2110 return del_chars(1L, fixpos);
2111 }
2112#endif
2113 return del_bytes(1L, fixpos);
2114}
2115
2116#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
2117/*
2118 * Like del_bytes(), but delete characters instead of bytes.
2119 */
2120 int
2121del_chars(count, fixpos)
2122 long count;
2123 int fixpos;
2124{
2125 long bytes = 0;
2126 long i;
2127 char_u *p;
2128 int l;
2129
2130 p = ml_get_cursor();
2131 for (i = 0; i < count && *p != NUL; ++i)
2132 {
2133 l = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p);
2134 bytes += l;
2135 p += l;
2136 }
2137 return del_bytes(bytes, fixpos);
2138}
2139#endif
2140
2141/*
2142 * Delete "count" bytes under the cursor.
2143 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2144 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2145 *
2146 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2147 */
2148 int
2149del_bytes(count, fixpos)
2150 long count;
2151 int fixpos;
2152{
2153 char_u *oldp, *newp;
2154 colnr_T oldlen;
2155 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2156 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2157 int was_alloced;
2158 long movelen;
2159
2160 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2161 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2162
2163 /*
2164 * Can't do anything when the cursor is on the NUL after the line.
2165 */
2166 if (col >= oldlen)
2167 return FAIL;
2168
2169#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2170 /* If 'delcombine' is set and deleting (less than) one character, only
2171 * delete the last combining character. */
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002172 if (p_deco && enc_utf8 && utfc_ptr2len_check(oldp + col) >= count)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002173 {
2174 int c1, c2;
2175 int n;
2176
2177 (void)utfc_ptr2char(oldp + col, &c1, &c2);
2178 if (c1 != NUL)
2179 {
2180 /* Find the last composing char, there can be several. */
2181 n = col;
2182 do
2183 {
2184 col = n;
2185 count = utf_ptr2len_check(oldp + n);
2186 n += count;
2187 } while (UTF_COMPOSINGLIKE(oldp + col, oldp + n));
2188 fixpos = 0;
2189 }
2190 }
2191#endif
2192
2193 /*
2194 * When count is too big, reduce it.
2195 */
2196 movelen = (long)oldlen - (long)col - count + 1; /* includes trailing NUL */
2197 if (movelen <= 1)
2198 {
2199 /*
2200 * If we just took off the last character of a non-blank line, and
2201 * fixpos is TRUE, we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2202 */
2203 if (col > 0 && fixpos)
2204 {
2205 --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2206#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2207 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
2208#endif
2209#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2210 if (has_mbyte)
2211 curwin->w_cursor.col -=
2212 (*mb_head_off)(oldp, oldp + curwin->w_cursor.col);
2213#endif
2214 }
2215 count = oldlen - col;
2216 movelen = 1;
2217 }
2218
2219 /*
2220 * If the old line has been allocated the deletion can be done in the
2221 * existing line. Otherwise a new line has to be allocated
2222 */
2223 was_alloced = ml_line_alloced(); /* check if oldp was allocated */
2224#ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2225 if (was_alloced && usingNetbeans)
2226 netbeans_removed(curbuf, lnum, col, count);
2227 /* else is handled by ml_replace() */
2228#endif
2229 if (was_alloced)
2230 newp = oldp; /* use same allocated memory */
2231 else
2232 { /* need to allocate a new line */
2233 newp = alloc((unsigned)(oldlen + 1 - count));
2234 if (newp == NULL)
2235 return FAIL;
2236 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2237 }
2238 mch_memmove(newp + col, oldp + col + count, (size_t)movelen);
2239 if (!was_alloced)
2240 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2241
2242 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2243 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2244
2245 return OK;
2246}
2247
2248/*
2249 * Delete from cursor to end of line.
2250 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2251 *
2252 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2253 */
2254 int
2255truncate_line(fixpos)
2256 int fixpos; /* if TRUE fix the cursor position when done */
2257{
2258 char_u *newp;
2259 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2260 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2261
2262 if (col == 0)
2263 newp = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
2264 else
2265 newp = vim_strnsave(ml_get(lnum), col);
2266
2267 if (newp == NULL)
2268 return FAIL;
2269
2270 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2271
2272 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2273 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2274
2275 /*
2276 * If "fixpos" is TRUE we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2277 */
2278 if (fixpos && curwin->w_cursor.col > 0)
2279 --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2280
2281 return OK;
2282}
2283
2284/*
2285 * Delete "nlines" lines at the cursor.
2286 * Saves the lines for undo first if "undo" is TRUE.
2287 */
2288 void
2289del_lines(nlines, undo)
2290 long nlines; /* number of lines to delete */
2291 int undo; /* if TRUE, prepare for undo */
2292{
2293 long n;
2294
2295 if (nlines <= 0)
2296 return;
2297
2298 /* save the deleted lines for undo */
2299 if (undo && u_savedel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, nlines) == FAIL)
2300 return;
2301
2302 for (n = 0; n < nlines; )
2303 {
2304 if (curbuf->b_ml.ml_flags & ML_EMPTY) /* nothing to delete */
2305 break;
2306
2307 ml_delete(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE);
2308 ++n;
2309
2310 /* If we delete the last line in the file, stop */
2311 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
2312 break;
2313 }
2314 /* adjust marks, mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2315 deleted_lines_mark(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, n);
2316
2317 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
2318 check_cursor_lnum();
2319}
2320
2321 int
2322gchar_pos(pos)
2323 pos_T *pos;
2324{
2325 char_u *ptr = ml_get_pos(pos);
2326
2327#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2328 if (has_mbyte)
2329 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ptr);
2330#endif
2331 return (int)*ptr;
2332}
2333
2334 int
2335gchar_cursor()
2336{
2337#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2338 if (has_mbyte)
2339 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ml_get_cursor());
2340#endif
2341 return (int)*ml_get_cursor();
2342}
2343
2344/*
2345 * Write a character at the current cursor position.
2346 * It is directly written into the block.
2347 */
2348 void
2349pchar_cursor(c)
2350 int c;
2351{
2352 *(ml_get_buf(curbuf, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE)
2353 + curwin->w_cursor.col) = c;
2354}
2355
2356#if 0 /* not used */
2357/*
2358 * Put *pos at end of current buffer
2359 */
2360 void
2361goto_endofbuf(pos)
2362 pos_T *pos;
2363{
2364 char_u *p;
2365
2366 pos->lnum = curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count;
2367 pos->col = 0;
2368 p = ml_get(pos->lnum);
2369 while (*p++)
2370 ++pos->col;
2371}
2372#endif
2373
2374/*
2375 * When extra == 0: Return TRUE if the cursor is before or on the first
2376 * non-blank in the line.
2377 * When extra == 1: Return TRUE if the cursor is before the first non-blank in
2378 * the line.
2379 */
2380 int
2381inindent(extra)
2382 int extra;
2383{
2384 char_u *ptr;
2385 colnr_T col;
2386
2387 for (col = 0, ptr = ml_get_curline(); vim_iswhite(*ptr); ++col)
2388 ++ptr;
2389 if (col >= curwin->w_cursor.col + extra)
2390 return TRUE;
2391 else
2392 return FALSE;
2393}
2394
2395/*
2396 * Skip to next part of an option argument: Skip space and comma.
2397 */
2398 char_u *
2399skip_to_option_part(p)
2400 char_u *p;
2401{
2402 if (*p == ',')
2403 ++p;
2404 while (*p == ' ')
2405 ++p;
2406 return p;
2407}
2408
2409/*
2410 * changed() is called when something in the current buffer is changed.
2411 *
2412 * Most often called through changed_bytes() and changed_lines(), which also
2413 * mark the area of the display to be redrawn.
2414 */
2415 void
2416changed()
2417{
2418#if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK)
2419 /* The text of the preediting area is inserted, but this doesn't
2420 * mean a change of the buffer yet. That is delayed until the
2421 * text is committed. (this means preedit becomes empty) */
2422 if (im_is_preediting() && !xim_changed_while_preediting)
2423 return;
2424 xim_changed_while_preediting = FALSE;
2425#endif
2426
2427 if (!curbuf->b_changed)
2428 {
2429 int save_msg_scroll = msg_scroll;
2430
2431 change_warning(0);
2432 /* Create a swap file if that is wanted.
2433 * Don't do this for "nofile" and "nowrite" buffer types. */
2434 if (curbuf->b_may_swap
2435#ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX
2436 && !bt_dontwrite(curbuf)
2437#endif
2438 )
2439 {
2440 ml_open_file(curbuf);
2441
2442 /* The ml_open_file() can cause an ATTENTION message.
2443 * Wait two seconds, to make sure the user reads this unexpected
2444 * message. Since we could be anywhere, call wait_return() now,
2445 * and don't let the emsg() set msg_scroll. */
2446 if (need_wait_return && emsg_silent == 0)
2447 {
2448 out_flush();
2449 ui_delay(2000L, TRUE);
2450 wait_return(TRUE);
2451 msg_scroll = save_msg_scroll;
2452 }
2453 }
2454 curbuf->b_changed = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00002455 ml_setflags(curbuf);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002456#ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2457 check_status(curbuf);
2458#endif
2459#ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2460 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */
2461#endif
2462 }
2463 ++curbuf->b_changedtick;
2464 ++global_changedtick;
2465}
2466
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002467static void changedOneline __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum));
2468static void changed_lines_buf __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002469static void changed_common __ARGS((linenr_T lnum, colnr_T col, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
2470
2471/*
2472 * Changed bytes within a single line for the current buffer.
2473 * - marks the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2474 * - marks the buffer changed by calling changed()
2475 * - invalidates cached values
2476 */
2477 void
2478changed_bytes(lnum, col)
2479 linenr_T lnum;
2480 colnr_T col;
2481{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002482 changedOneline(curbuf, lnum);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002483 changed_common(lnum, col, lnum + 1, 0L);
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002484
2485#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2486 /* Diff highlighting in other diff windows may need to be updated too. */
2487 if (curwin->w_p_diff)
2488 {
2489 win_T *wp;
2490 linenr_T wlnum;
2491
2492 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2493 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2494 {
2495 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2496 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2497 if (wlnum > 0)
2498 changedOneline(wp->w_buffer, wlnum);
2499 }
2500 }
2501#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002502}
2503
2504 static void
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002505changedOneline(buf, lnum)
2506 buf_T *buf;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002507 linenr_T lnum;
2508{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002509 if (buf->b_mod_set)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002510 {
2511 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002512 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2513 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2514 else if (lnum >= buf->b_mod_bot)
2515 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002516 }
2517 else
2518 {
2519 /* set the area that must be redisplayed to one line */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002520 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2521 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2522 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2523 buf->b_mod_xlines = 0;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002524 }
2525}
2526
2527/*
2528 * Appended "count" lines below line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2529 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2530 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2531 */
2532 void
2533appended_lines(lnum, count)
2534 linenr_T lnum;
2535 long count;
2536{
2537 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2538}
2539
2540/*
2541 * Like appended_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2542 */
2543 void
2544appended_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2545 linenr_T lnum;
2546 long count;
2547{
2548 mark_adjust(lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, count, 0L);
2549 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2550}
2551
2552/*
2553 * Deleted "count" lines at line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2554 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2555 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2556 */
2557 void
2558deleted_lines(lnum, count)
2559 linenr_T lnum;
2560 long count;
2561{
2562 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2563}
2564
2565/*
2566 * Like deleted_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2567 */
2568 void
2569deleted_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2570 linenr_T lnum;
2571 long count;
2572{
2573 mark_adjust(lnum, (linenr_T)(lnum + count - 1), (long)MAXLNUM, -count);
2574 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2575}
2576
2577/*
2578 * Changed lines for the current buffer.
2579 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2580 * - mark the buffer changed by calling changed()
2581 * - mark the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2582 * - invalidate cached values
2583 * "lnum" is the first line that needs displaying, "lnume" the first line
2584 * below the changed lines (BEFORE the change).
2585 * When only inserting lines, "lnum" and "lnume" are equal.
2586 * Takes care of calling changed() and updating b_mod_*.
2587 */
2588 void
2589changed_lines(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2590 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */
2591 colnr_T col; /* column in first line with change */
2592 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */
2593 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2594{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002595 changed_lines_buf(curbuf, lnum, lnume, xtra);
2596
2597#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2598 if (xtra == 0 && curwin->w_p_diff)
2599 {
2600 /* When the number of lines doesn't change then mark_adjust() isn't
2601 * called and other diff buffers still need to be marked for
2602 * displaying. */
2603 win_T *wp;
2604 linenr_T wlnum;
2605
2606 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2607 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2608 {
2609 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2610 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2611 if (wlnum > 0)
2612 changed_lines_buf(wp->w_buffer, wlnum,
2613 lnume - lnum + wlnum, 0L);
2614 }
2615 }
2616#endif
2617
2618 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra);
2619}
2620
2621 static void
2622changed_lines_buf(buf, lnum, lnume, xtra)
2623 buf_T *buf;
2624 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */
2625 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */
2626 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2627{
2628 if (buf->b_mod_set)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002629 {
2630 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002631 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2632 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2633 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_bot)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002634 {
2635 /* adjust old bot position for xtra lines */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002636 buf->b_mod_bot += xtra;
2637 if (buf->b_mod_bot < lnum)
2638 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002639 }
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002640 if (lnume + xtra > buf->b_mod_bot)
2641 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2642 buf->b_mod_xlines += xtra;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002643 }
2644 else
2645 {
2646 /* set the area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002647 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2648 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2649 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2650 buf->b_mod_xlines = xtra;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002651 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002652}
2653
2654 static void
2655changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2656 linenr_T lnum;
2657 colnr_T col;
2658 linenr_T lnume;
2659 long xtra;
2660{
2661 win_T *wp;
2662 int i;
2663#ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2664 int cols;
2665 pos_T *p;
2666 int add;
2667#endif
2668
2669 /* mark the buffer as modified */
2670 changed();
2671
2672 /* set the '. mark */
2673 if (!cmdmod.keepjumps)
2674 {
2675 curbuf->b_last_change.lnum = lnum;
2676 curbuf->b_last_change.col = col;
2677
2678#ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2679 /* Create a new entry if a new undo-able change was started or we
2680 * don't have an entry yet. */
2681 if (curbuf->b_new_change || curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2682 {
2683 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2684 add = TRUE;
2685 else
2686 {
2687 /* Don't create a new entry when the line number is the same
2688 * as the last one and the column is not too far away. Avoids
2689 * creating many entries for typing "xxxxx". */
2690 p = &curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1];
2691 if (p->lnum != lnum)
2692 add = TRUE;
2693 else
2694 {
2695 cols = comp_textwidth(FALSE);
2696 if (cols == 0)
2697 cols = 79;
2698 add = (p->col + cols < col || col + cols < p->col);
2699 }
2700 }
2701 if (add)
2702 {
2703 /* This is the first of a new sequence of undo-able changes
2704 * and it's at some distance of the last change. Use a new
2705 * position in the changelist. */
2706 curbuf->b_new_change = FALSE;
2707
2708 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == JUMPLISTSIZE)
2709 {
2710 /* changelist is full: remove oldest entry */
2711 curbuf->b_changelistlen = JUMPLISTSIZE - 1;
2712 mch_memmove(curbuf->b_changelist, curbuf->b_changelist + 1,
2713 sizeof(pos_T) * (JUMPLISTSIZE - 1));
2714 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2715 {
2716 /* Correct position in changelist for other windows on
2717 * this buffer. */
2718 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf && wp->w_changelistidx > 0)
2719 --wp->w_changelistidx;
2720 }
2721 }
2722 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2723 {
2724 /* For other windows, if the position in the changelist is
2725 * at the end it stays at the end. */
2726 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf
2727 && wp->w_changelistidx == curbuf->b_changelistlen)
2728 ++wp->w_changelistidx;
2729 }
2730 ++curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2731 }
2732 }
2733 curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1] =
2734 curbuf->b_last_change;
2735 /* The current window is always after the last change, so that "g,"
2736 * takes you back to it. */
2737 curwin->w_changelistidx = curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2738#endif
2739 }
2740
2741 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2742 {
2743 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf)
2744 {
2745 /* Mark this window to be redrawn later. */
2746 if (wp->w_redr_type < VALID)
2747 wp->w_redr_type = VALID;
2748
2749 /* Check if a change in the buffer has invalidated the cached
2750 * values for the cursor. */
2751#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2752 /*
2753 * Update the folds for this window. Can't postpone this, because
2754 * a following operator might work on the whole fold: ">>dd".
2755 */
2756 foldUpdate(wp, lnum, lnume + xtra - 1);
2757
2758 /* The change may cause lines above or below the change to become
2759 * included in a fold. Set lnum/lnume to the first/last line that
2760 * might be displayed differently.
2761 * Set w_cline_folded here as an efficient way to update it when
2762 * inserting lines just above a closed fold. */
2763 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnum, &lnum, NULL, FALSE, NULL);
2764 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum)
2765 wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2766 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnume, NULL, &lnume, FALSE, NULL);
2767 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnume)
2768 wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2769
2770 /* If the changed line is in a range of previously folded lines,
2771 * compare with the first line in that range. */
2772 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum <= lnum)
2773 {
2774 i = find_wl_entry(wp, lnum);
2775 if (i >= 0 && wp->w_cursor.lnum > wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum)
2776 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2777 }
2778#endif
2779
2780 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum > lnum)
2781 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2782 else if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum && wp->w_cursor.col >= col)
2783 changed_cline_bef_curs_win(wp);
2784 if (wp->w_botline >= lnum)
2785 {
2786 /* Assume that botline doesn't change (inserted lines make
2787 * other lines scroll down below botline). */
2788 approximate_botline_win(wp);
2789 }
2790
2791 /* Check if any w_lines[] entries have become invalid.
2792 * For entries below the change: Correct the lnums for
2793 * inserted/deleted lines. Makes it possible to stop displaying
2794 * after the change. */
2795 for (i = 0; i < wp->w_lines_valid; ++i)
2796 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid)
2797 {
2798 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum >= lnum)
2799 {
2800 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum < lnume)
2801 {
2802 /* line included in change */
2803 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2804 }
2805 else if (xtra != 0)
2806 {
2807 /* line below change */
2808 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum += xtra;
2809#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2810 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum += xtra;
2811#endif
2812 }
2813 }
2814#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2815 else if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum >= lnum)
2816 {
2817 /* change somewhere inside this range of folded lines,
2818 * may need to be redrawn */
2819 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2820 }
2821#endif
2822 }
2823 }
2824 }
2825
2826 /* Call update_screen() later, which checks out what needs to be redrawn,
2827 * since it notices b_mod_set and then uses b_mod_*. */
2828 if (must_redraw < VALID)
2829 must_redraw = VALID;
2830}
2831
2832/*
2833 * unchanged() is called when the changed flag must be reset for buffer 'buf'
2834 */
2835 void
2836unchanged(buf, ff)
2837 buf_T *buf;
2838 int ff; /* also reset 'fileformat' */
2839{
2840 if (buf->b_changed || (ff && file_ff_differs(buf)))
2841 {
2842 buf->b_changed = 0;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00002843 ml_setflags(buf);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002844 if (ff)
2845 save_file_ff(buf);
2846#ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2847 check_status(buf);
2848#endif
2849#ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2850 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */
2851#endif
2852 }
2853 ++buf->b_changedtick;
2854 ++global_changedtick;
2855#ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2856 netbeans_unmodified(buf);
2857#endif
2858}
2859
2860#if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO)
2861/*
2862 * check_status: called when the status bars for the buffer 'buf'
2863 * need to be updated
2864 */
2865 void
2866check_status(buf)
2867 buf_T *buf;
2868{
2869 win_T *wp;
2870
2871 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2872 if (wp->w_buffer == buf && wp->w_status_height)
2873 {
2874 wp->w_redr_status = TRUE;
2875 if (must_redraw < VALID)
2876 must_redraw = VALID;
2877 }
2878}
2879#endif
2880
2881/*
2882 * If the file is readonly, give a warning message with the first change.
2883 * Don't do this for autocommands.
2884 * Don't use emsg(), because it flushes the macro buffer.
2885 * If we have undone all changes b_changed will be FALSE, but b_did_warn
2886 * will be TRUE.
2887 */
2888 void
2889change_warning(col)
2890 int col; /* column for message; non-zero when in insert
2891 mode and 'showmode' is on */
2892{
2893 if (curbuf->b_did_warn == FALSE
2894 && curbufIsChanged() == 0
2895#ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2896 && !autocmd_busy
2897#endif
2898 && curbuf->b_p_ro)
2899 {
2900#ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2901 apply_autocmds(EVENT_FILECHANGEDRO, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf);
2902 if (!curbuf->b_p_ro)
2903 return;
2904#endif
2905 /*
2906 * Do what msg() does, but with a column offset if the warning should
2907 * be after the mode message.
2908 */
2909 msg_start();
2910 if (msg_row == Rows - 1)
2911 msg_col = col;
Bram Moolenaar2df6dcc2004-07-12 15:53:54 +00002912 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002913 MSG_PUTS_ATTR(_("W10: Warning: Changing a readonly file"),
2914 hl_attr(HLF_W) | MSG_HIST);
2915 msg_clr_eos();
2916 (void)msg_end();
2917 if (msg_silent == 0 && !silent_mode)
2918 {
2919 out_flush();
2920 ui_delay(1000L, TRUE); /* give the user time to think about it */
2921 }
2922 curbuf->b_did_warn = TRUE;
2923 redraw_cmdline = FALSE; /* don't redraw and erase the message */
2924 if (msg_row < Rows - 1)
2925 showmode();
2926 }
2927}
2928
2929/*
2930 * Ask for a reply from the user, a 'y' or a 'n'.
2931 * No other characters are accepted, the message is repeated until a valid
2932 * reply is entered or CTRL-C is hit.
2933 * If direct is TRUE, don't use vgetc() but ui_inchar(), don't get characters
2934 * from any buffers but directly from the user.
2935 *
2936 * return the 'y' or 'n'
2937 */
2938 int
2939ask_yesno(str, direct)
2940 char_u *str;
2941 int direct;
2942{
2943 int r = ' ';
2944 int save_State = State;
2945
2946 if (exiting) /* put terminal in raw mode for this question */
2947 settmode(TMODE_RAW);
2948 ++no_wait_return;
2949#ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
2950 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */
2951#endif
2952 State = CONFIRM; /* mouse behaves like with :confirm */
2953#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2954 setmouse(); /* disables mouse for xterm */
2955#endif
2956 ++no_mapping;
2957 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
2958
2959 while (r != 'y' && r != 'n')
2960 {
2961 /* same highlighting as for wait_return */
2962 smsg_attr(hl_attr(HLF_R), (char_u *)"%s (y/n)?", str);
2963 if (direct)
2964 r = get_keystroke();
2965 else
2966 r = safe_vgetc();
2967 if (r == Ctrl_C || r == ESC)
2968 r = 'n';
2969 msg_putchar(r); /* show what you typed */
2970 out_flush();
2971 }
2972 --no_wait_return;
2973 State = save_State;
2974#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2975 setmouse();
2976#endif
2977 --no_mapping;
2978 --allow_keys;
2979
2980 return r;
2981}
2982
2983/*
2984 * Get a key stroke directly from the user.
2985 * Ignores mouse clicks and scrollbar events, except a click for the left
2986 * button (used at the more prompt).
2987 * Doesn't use vgetc(), because it syncs undo and eats mapped characters.
2988 * Disadvantage: typeahead is ignored.
2989 * Translates the interrupt character for unix to ESC.
2990 */
2991 int
2992get_keystroke()
2993{
2994#define CBUFLEN 151
2995 char_u buf[CBUFLEN];
2996 int len = 0;
2997 int n;
2998 int save_mapped_ctrl_c = mapped_ctrl_c;
2999
3000 mapped_ctrl_c = FALSE; /* mappings are not used here */
3001 for (;;)
3002 {
3003 cursor_on();
3004 out_flush();
3005
3006 /* First time: blocking wait. Second time: wait up to 100ms for a
3007 * terminal code to complete. Leave some room for check_termcode() to
3008 * insert a key code into (max 5 chars plus NUL). And
3009 * fix_input_buffer() can triple the number of bytes. */
3010 n = ui_inchar(buf + len, (CBUFLEN - 6 - len) / 3,
3011 len == 0 ? -1L : 100L, 0);
3012 if (n > 0)
3013 {
3014 /* Replace zero and CSI by a special key code. */
3015 n = fix_input_buffer(buf + len, n, FALSE);
3016 len += n;
3017 }
3018
3019 /* incomplete termcode: get more characters */
3020 if ((n = check_termcode(1, buf, len)) < 0)
3021 continue;
3022 /* found a termcode: adjust length */
3023 if (n > 0)
3024 len = n;
3025 if (len == 0) /* nothing typed yet */
3026 continue;
3027
3028 /* Handle modifier and/or special key code. */
3029 n = buf[0];
3030 if (n == K_SPECIAL)
3031 {
3032 n = TO_SPECIAL(buf[1], buf[2]);
3033 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER
3034 || n == K_IGNORE
3035#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3036 || n == K_LEFTMOUSE_NM
3037 || n == K_LEFTDRAG
3038 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE
3039 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE_NM
3040 || n == K_MIDDLEMOUSE
3041 || n == K_MIDDLEDRAG
3042 || n == K_MIDDLERELEASE
3043 || n == K_RIGHTMOUSE
3044 || n == K_RIGHTDRAG
3045 || n == K_RIGHTRELEASE
3046 || n == K_MOUSEDOWN
3047 || n == K_MOUSEUP
3048 || n == K_X1MOUSE
3049 || n == K_X1DRAG
3050 || n == K_X1RELEASE
3051 || n == K_X2MOUSE
3052 || n == K_X2DRAG
3053 || n == K_X2RELEASE
3054# ifdef FEAT_GUI
3055 || n == K_VER_SCROLLBAR
3056 || n == K_HOR_SCROLLBAR
3057# endif
3058#endif
3059 )
3060 {
3061 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER)
3062 mod_mask = buf[2];
3063 len -= 3;
3064 if (len > 0)
3065 mch_memmove(buf, buf + 3, (size_t)len);
3066 continue;
3067 }
3068 }
3069#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
3070 if (has_mbyte)
3071 {
3072 if (MB_BYTE2LEN(n) > len)
3073 continue; /* more bytes to get */
3074 buf[len >= CBUFLEN ? CBUFLEN - 1 : len] = NUL;
3075 n = (*mb_ptr2char)(buf);
3076 }
3077#endif
3078#ifdef UNIX
3079 if (n == intr_char)
3080 n = ESC;
3081#endif
3082 break;
3083 }
3084
3085 mapped_ctrl_c = save_mapped_ctrl_c;
3086 return n;
3087}
3088
3089/*
3090 * get a number from the user
3091 */
3092 int
3093get_number(colon)
3094 int colon; /* allow colon to abort */
3095{
3096 int n = 0;
3097 int c;
3098
3099 /* When not printing messages, the user won't know what to type, return a
3100 * zero (as if CR was hit). */
3101 if (msg_silent != 0)
3102 return 0;
3103
3104#ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
3105 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */
3106#endif
3107 ++no_mapping;
3108 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
3109 for (;;)
3110 {
3111 windgoto(msg_row, msg_col);
3112 c = safe_vgetc();
3113 if (VIM_ISDIGIT(c))
3114 {
3115 n = n * 10 + c - '0';
3116 msg_putchar(c);
3117 }
3118 else if (c == K_DEL || c == K_KDEL || c == K_BS || c == Ctrl_H)
3119 {
3120 n /= 10;
3121 MSG_PUTS("\b \b");
3122 }
3123 else if (n == 0 && c == ':' && colon)
3124 {
3125 stuffcharReadbuff(':');
3126 if (!exmode_active)
3127 cmdline_row = msg_row;
3128 skip_redraw = TRUE; /* skip redraw once */
3129 do_redraw = FALSE;
3130 break;
3131 }
3132 else if (c == CAR || c == NL || c == Ctrl_C || c == ESC)
3133 break;
3134 }
3135 --no_mapping;
3136 --allow_keys;
3137 return n;
3138}
3139
3140 void
3141msgmore(n)
3142 long n;
3143{
3144 long pn;
3145
3146 if (global_busy /* no messages now, wait until global is finished */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003147 || !messaging()) /* 'lazyredraw' set, don't do messages now */
3148 return;
3149
Bram Moolenaar7df2d662005-01-25 22:18:08 +00003150 /* We don't want to overwrite another important message, but do overwrite
3151 * a previous "more lines" or "fewer lines" message, so that "5dd" and
3152 * then "put" reports the last action. */
3153 if (keep_msg != NULL && !keep_msg_more)
3154 return;
3155
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003156 if (n > 0)
3157 pn = n;
3158 else
3159 pn = -n;
3160
3161 if (pn > p_report)
3162 {
3163 if (pn == 1)
3164 {
3165 if (n > 0)
3166 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 more line"));
3167 else
3168 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 line less"));
3169 }
3170 else
3171 {
3172 if (n > 0)
3173 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld more lines"), pn);
3174 else
3175 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld fewer lines"), pn);
3176 }
3177 if (got_int)
3178 STRCAT(msg_buf, _(" (Interrupted)"));
3179 if (msg(msg_buf))
3180 {
3181 set_keep_msg(msg_buf);
3182 keep_msg_attr = 0;
Bram Moolenaar7df2d662005-01-25 22:18:08 +00003183 keep_msg_more = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003184 }
3185 }
3186}
3187
3188/*
3189 * flush map and typeahead buffers and give a warning for an error
3190 */
3191 void
3192beep_flush()
3193{
3194 if (emsg_silent == 0)
3195 {
3196 flush_buffers(FALSE);
3197 vim_beep();
3198 }
3199}
3200
3201/*
3202 * give a warning for an error
3203 */
3204 void
3205vim_beep()
3206{
3207 if (emsg_silent == 0)
3208 {
3209 if (p_vb
3210#ifdef FEAT_GUI
3211 /* While the GUI is starting up the termcap is set for the GUI
3212 * but the output still goes to a terminal. */
3213 && !(gui.in_use && gui.starting)
3214#endif
3215 )
3216 {
3217 out_str(T_VB);
3218 }
3219 else
3220 {
3221#ifdef MSDOS
3222 /*
3223 * The number of beeps outputted is reduced to avoid having to wait
3224 * for all the beeps to finish. This is only a problem on systems
3225 * where the beeps don't overlap.
3226 */
3227 if (beep_count == 0 || beep_count == 10)
3228 {
3229 out_char(BELL);
3230 beep_count = 1;
3231 }
3232 else
3233 ++beep_count;
3234#else
3235 out_char(BELL);
3236#endif
3237 }
Bram Moolenaar5313dcb2005-02-22 08:56:13 +00003238
3239 /* When 'verbose' is set and we are sourcing a script or executing a
3240 * function give the user a hint where the beep comes from. */
3241 if (vim_strchr(p_debug, 'e') != NULL)
3242 {
3243 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
3244 msg_attr((char_u *)_("Beep!"), hl_attr(HLF_W));
3245 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003246 }
3247}
3248
3249/*
3250 * To get the "real" home directory:
3251 * - get value of $HOME
3252 * For Unix:
3253 * - go to that directory
3254 * - do mch_dirname() to get the real name of that directory.
3255 * This also works with mounts and links.
3256 * Don't do this for MS-DOS, it will change the "current dir" for a drive.
3257 */
3258static char_u *homedir = NULL;
3259
3260 void
3261init_homedir()
3262{
3263 char_u *var;
3264
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003265 /* In case we are called a second time (when 'encoding' changes). */
3266 vim_free(homedir);
3267 homedir = NULL;
3268
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003269#ifdef VMS
3270 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
3271#else
3272 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
3273#endif
3274
3275 if (var != NULL && *var == NUL) /* empty is same as not set */
3276 var = NULL;
3277
3278#ifdef WIN3264
3279 /*
3280 * Weird but true: $HOME may contain an indirect reference to another
3281 * variable, esp. "%USERPROFILE%". Happens when $USERPROFILE isn't set
3282 * when $HOME is being set.
3283 */
3284 if (var != NULL && *var == '%')
3285 {
3286 char_u *p;
3287 char_u *exp;
3288
3289 p = vim_strchr(var + 1, '%');
3290 if (p != NULL)
3291 {
3292 STRNCPY(NameBuff, var + 1, p - (var + 1));
3293 NameBuff[p - (var + 1)] = NUL;
3294 exp = mch_getenv(NameBuff);
3295 if (exp != NULL && *exp != NUL
3296 && STRLEN(exp) + STRLEN(p) < MAXPATHL)
3297 {
3298 sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", exp, p + 1);
3299 var = NameBuff;
3300 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3301 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3302 }
3303 }
3304 }
3305
3306 /*
3307 * Typically, $HOME is not defined on Windows, unless the user has
3308 * specifically defined it for Vim's sake. However, on Windows NT
3309 * platforms, $HOMEDRIVE and $HOMEPATH are automatically defined for
3310 * each user. Try constructing $HOME from these.
3311 */
3312 if (var == NULL)
3313 {
3314 char_u *homedrive, *homepath;
3315
3316 homedrive = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEDRIVE");
3317 homepath = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEPATH");
3318 if (homedrive != NULL && homepath != NULL
3319 && STRLEN(homedrive) + STRLEN(homepath) < MAXPATHL)
3320 {
3321 sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", homedrive, homepath);
3322 if (NameBuff[0] != NUL)
3323 {
3324 var = NameBuff;
3325 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3326 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3327 }
3328 }
3329 }
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003330
3331# if defined(FEAT_MBYTE)
3332 if (enc_utf8 && var != NULL)
3333 {
3334 int len;
3335 char_u *pp;
3336
3337 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are
3338 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3339 acp_to_enc(var, STRLEN(var), &pp, &len);
3340 if (pp != NULL)
3341 {
3342 homedir = pp;
3343 return;
3344 }
3345 }
3346# endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003347#endif
3348
3349#if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3350 /*
3351 * Default home dir is C:/
3352 * Best assumption we can make in such a situation.
3353 */
3354 if (var == NULL)
3355 var = "C:/";
3356#endif
3357 if (var != NULL)
3358 {
3359#ifdef UNIX
3360 /*
3361 * Change to the directory and get the actual path. This resolves
3362 * links. Don't do it when we can't return.
3363 */
3364 if (mch_dirname(NameBuff, MAXPATHL) == OK
3365 && mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) == 0)
3366 {
3367 if (!mch_chdir((char *)var) && mch_dirname(IObuff, IOSIZE) == OK)
3368 var = IObuff;
3369 if (mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) != 0)
3370 EMSG(_(e_prev_dir));
3371 }
3372#endif
3373 homedir = vim_strsave(var);
3374 }
3375}
3376
3377/*
3378 * Expand environment variable with path name.
3379 * "~/" is also expanded, using $HOME. For Unix "~user/" is expanded.
3380 * Skips over "\ ", "\~" and "\$".
3381 * If anything fails no expansion is done and dst equals src.
3382 */
3383 void
3384expand_env(src, dst, dstlen)
3385 char_u *src; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3386 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
3387 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
3388{
3389 expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, FALSE);
3390}
3391
3392 void
3393expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, esc)
3394 char_u *src; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3395 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
3396 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
3397 int esc; /* escape spaces in expanded variables */
3398{
3399 char_u *tail;
3400 int c;
3401 char_u *var;
3402 int copy_char;
3403 int mustfree; /* var was allocated, need to free it later */
3404 int at_start = TRUE; /* at start of a name */
3405
3406 src = skipwhite(src);
3407 --dstlen; /* leave one char space for "\," */
3408 while (*src && dstlen > 0)
3409 {
3410 copy_char = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003411 if ((*src == '$'
3412#ifdef VMS
3413 && at_start
3414#endif
3415 )
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003416#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3417 || *src == '%'
3418#endif
3419 || (*src == '~' && at_start))
3420 {
3421 mustfree = FALSE;
3422
3423 /*
3424 * The variable name is copied into dst temporarily, because it may
3425 * be a string in read-only memory and a NUL needs to be appended.
3426 */
3427 if (*src != '~') /* environment var */
3428 {
3429 tail = src + 1;
3430 var = dst;
3431 c = dstlen - 1;
3432
3433#ifdef UNIX
3434 /* Unix has ${var-name} type environment vars */
3435 if (*tail == '{' && !vim_isIDc('{'))
3436 {
3437 tail++; /* ignore '{' */
3438 while (c-- > 0 && *tail && *tail != '}')
3439 *var++ = *tail++;
3440 }
3441 else
3442#endif
3443 {
3444 while (c-- > 0 && *tail != NUL && ((vim_isIDc(*tail))
3445#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3446 || (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3447#endif
3448 ))
3449 {
3450#ifdef OS2 /* env vars only in uppercase */
3451 *var++ = TOUPPER_LOC(*tail);
3452 tail++; /* toupper() may be a macro! */
3453#else
3454 *var++ = *tail++;
3455#endif
3456 }
3457 }
3458
3459#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3460# ifdef UNIX
3461 if (src[1] == '{' && *tail != '}')
3462# else
3463 if (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3464# endif
3465 var = NULL;
3466 else
3467 {
3468# ifdef UNIX
3469 if (src[1] == '{')
3470# else
3471 if (*src == '%')
3472#endif
3473 ++tail;
3474#endif
3475 *var = NUL;
3476 var = vim_getenv(dst, &mustfree);
3477#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3478 }
3479#endif
3480 }
3481 /* home directory */
3482 else if ( src[1] == NUL
3483 || vim_ispathsep(src[1])
3484 || vim_strchr((char_u *)" ,\t\n", src[1]) != NULL)
3485 {
3486 var = homedir;
3487 tail = src + 1;
3488 }
3489 else /* user directory */
3490 {
3491#if defined(UNIX) || (defined(VMS) && defined(USER_HOME))
3492 /*
3493 * Copy ~user to dst[], so we can put a NUL after it.
3494 */
3495 tail = src;
3496 var = dst;
3497 c = dstlen - 1;
3498 while ( c-- > 0
3499 && *tail
3500 && vim_isfilec(*tail)
3501 && !vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3502 *var++ = *tail++;
3503 *var = NUL;
3504# ifdef UNIX
3505 /*
3506 * If the system supports getpwnam(), use it.
3507 * Otherwise, or if getpwnam() fails, the shell is used to
3508 * expand ~user. This is slower and may fail if the shell
3509 * does not support ~user (old versions of /bin/sh).
3510 */
3511# if defined(HAVE_GETPWNAM) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H)
3512 {
3513 struct passwd *pw;
3514
3515 pw = getpwnam((char *)dst + 1);
3516 if (pw != NULL)
3517 var = (char_u *)pw->pw_dir;
3518 else
3519 var = NULL;
3520 }
3521 if (var == NULL)
3522# endif
3523 {
3524 expand_T xpc;
3525
3526 ExpandInit(&xpc);
3527 xpc.xp_context = EXPAND_FILES;
3528 var = ExpandOne(&xpc, dst, NULL,
3529 WILD_ADD_SLASH|WILD_SILENT, WILD_EXPAND_FREE);
3530 ExpandCleanup(&xpc);
3531 mustfree = TRUE;
3532 }
3533
3534# else /* !UNIX, thus VMS */
3535 /*
3536 * USER_HOME is a comma-separated list of
3537 * directories to search for the user account in.
3538 */
3539 {
3540 char_u test[MAXPATHL], paths[MAXPATHL];
3541 char_u *path, *next_path, *ptr;
3542 struct stat st;
3543
3544 STRCPY(paths, USER_HOME);
3545 next_path = paths;
3546 while (*next_path)
3547 {
3548 for (path = next_path; *next_path && *next_path != ',';
3549 next_path++);
3550 if (*next_path)
3551 *next_path++ = NUL;
3552 STRCPY(test, path);
3553 STRCAT(test, "/");
3554 STRCAT(test, dst + 1);
3555 if (mch_stat(test, &st) == 0)
3556 {
3557 var = alloc(STRLEN(test) + 1);
3558 STRCPY(var, test);
3559 mustfree = TRUE;
3560 break;
3561 }
3562 }
3563 }
3564# endif /* UNIX */
3565#else
3566 /* cannot expand user's home directory, so don't try */
3567 var = NULL;
3568 tail = (char_u *)""; /* for gcc */
3569#endif /* UNIX || VMS */
3570 }
3571
3572#ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
3573 /* If 'shellslash' is set change backslashes to forward slashes.
3574 * Can't use slash_adjust(), p_ssl may be set temporarily. */
3575 if (p_ssl && var != NULL && vim_strchr(var, '\\') != NULL)
3576 {
3577 char_u *p = vim_strsave(var);
3578
3579 if (p != NULL)
3580 {
3581 if (mustfree)
3582 vim_free(var);
3583 var = p;
3584 mustfree = TRUE;
3585 forward_slash(var);
3586 }
3587 }
3588#endif
3589
3590 /* If "var" contains white space, escape it with a backslash.
3591 * Required for ":e ~/tt" when $HOME includes a space. */
3592 if (esc && var != NULL && vim_strpbrk(var, (char_u *)" \t") != NULL)
3593 {
3594 char_u *p = vim_strsave_escaped(var, (char_u *)" \t");
3595
3596 if (p != NULL)
3597 {
3598 if (mustfree)
3599 vim_free(var);
3600 var = p;
3601 mustfree = TRUE;
3602 }
3603 }
3604
3605 if (var != NULL && *var != NUL
3606 && (STRLEN(var) + STRLEN(tail) + 1 < (unsigned)dstlen))
3607 {
3608 STRCPY(dst, var);
3609 dstlen -= (int)STRLEN(var);
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003610 c = STRLEN(var);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003611 /* if var[] ends in a path separator and tail[] starts
3612 * with it, skip a character */
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003613 if (*var != NUL && after_pathsep(dst, dst + c)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003614#if defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME) || defined(AMIGA)
3615 && dst[-1] != ':'
3616#endif
3617 && vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3618 ++tail;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003619 dst += c;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003620 src = tail;
3621 copy_char = FALSE;
3622 }
3623 if (mustfree)
3624 vim_free(var);
3625 }
3626
3627 if (copy_char) /* copy at least one char */
3628 {
3629 /*
3630 * Recogize the start of a new name, for '~'.
3631 */
3632 at_start = FALSE;
3633 if (src[0] == '\\' && src[1] != NUL)
3634 {
3635 *dst++ = *src++;
3636 --dstlen;
3637 }
3638 else if (src[0] == ' ' || src[0] == ',')
3639 at_start = TRUE;
3640 *dst++ = *src++;
3641 --dstlen;
3642 }
3643 }
3644 *dst = NUL;
3645}
3646
3647/*
3648 * Vim's version of getenv().
3649 * Special handling of $HOME, $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME.
Bram Moolenaar2f6b0b82005-03-08 22:43:10 +00003650 * Also does ACP to 'enc' conversion for Win32.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003651 */
3652 char_u *
3653vim_getenv(name, mustfree)
3654 char_u *name;
3655 int *mustfree; /* set to TRUE when returned is allocated */
3656{
3657 char_u *p;
3658 char_u *pend;
3659 int vimruntime;
3660
3661#if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3662 /* use "C:/" when $HOME is not set */
3663 if (STRCMP(name, "HOME") == 0)
3664 return homedir;
3665#endif
3666
3667 p = mch_getenv(name);
3668 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */
3669 p = NULL;
3670
3671 if (p != NULL)
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003672 {
3673#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3674 if (enc_utf8)
3675 {
3676 int len;
3677 char_u *pp;
3678
3679 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are
3680 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3681 acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3682 if (pp != NULL)
3683 {
3684 p = pp;
3685 *mustfree = TRUE;
3686 }
3687 }
3688#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003689 return p;
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003690 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003691
3692 vimruntime = (STRCMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0);
3693 if (!vimruntime && STRCMP(name, "VIM") != 0)
3694 return NULL;
3695
3696 /*
3697 * When expanding $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using $VIM/vim<version> or $VIM.
3698 * Don't do this when default_vimruntime_dir is non-empty.
3699 */
3700 if (vimruntime
3701#ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3702 && *default_vimruntime_dir == NUL
3703#endif
3704 )
3705 {
3706 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3707 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */
3708 p = NULL;
3709 if (p != NULL)
3710 {
3711 p = vim_version_dir(p);
3712 if (p != NULL)
3713 *mustfree = TRUE;
3714 else
3715 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003716
3717#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3718 if (enc_utf8)
3719 {
3720 int len;
3721 char_u *pp;
3722
3723 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions
3724 * are not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII
3725 * characters. */
3726 acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3727 if (pp != NULL)
3728 {
3729 if (mustfree)
3730 vim_free(p);
3731 p = pp;
3732 *mustfree = TRUE;
3733 }
3734 }
3735#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003736 }
3737 }
3738
3739 /*
3740 * When expanding $VIM or $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using:
3741 * - the directory name from 'helpfile' (unless it contains '$')
3742 * - the executable name from argv[0]
3743 */
3744 if (p == NULL)
3745 {
3746 if (p_hf != NULL && vim_strchr(p_hf, '$') == NULL)
3747 p = p_hf;
3748#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3749 /*
3750 * Use the name of the executable, obtained from argv[0].
3751 */
3752 else
3753 p = exe_name;
3754#endif
3755 if (p != NULL)
3756 {
3757 /* remove the file name */
3758 pend = gettail(p);
3759
3760 /* remove "doc/" from 'helpfile', if present */
3761 if (p == p_hf)
3762 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"doc");
3763
3764#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3765# ifdef MACOS_X
3766 /* remove "build/..." from exe_name, if present */
3767 if (p == exe_name)
3768 {
3769 char_u *pend1;
3770 char_u *pend2;
3771
3772 pend1 = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"Contents/MacOS");
3773 pend2 = remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend1, (char_u *)".app");
3774 pend = remove_tail(p, pend2, (char_u *)"build");
3775 /* When runnig from project builder get rid of the
3776 * build/???.app, otherwise keep the ???.app */
3777 if (pend2 == pend)
3778 pend = pend1;
3779 }
3780# endif
3781 /* remove "src/" from exe_name, if present */
3782 if (p == exe_name)
3783 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"src");
3784#endif
3785
3786 /* for $VIM, remove "runtime/" or "vim54/", if present */
3787 if (!vimruntime)
3788 {
3789 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME);
3790 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT);
3791 }
3792
3793 /* remove trailing path separator */
3794#ifndef MACOS_CLASSIC
3795 /* With MacOS path (with colons) the final colon is required */
3796 /* to avoid confusion between absoulute and relative path */
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003797 if (pend > p && after_pathsep(p, pend))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003798 --pend;
3799#endif
3800
3801 /* check that the result is a directory name */
3802 p = vim_strnsave(p, (int)(pend - p));
3803
3804 if (p != NULL && !mch_isdir(p))
3805 {
3806 vim_free(p);
3807 p = NULL;
3808 }
3809 else
3810 {
3811#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3812 /* may add "/vim54" or "/runtime" if it exists */
3813 if (vimruntime && (pend = vim_version_dir(p)) != NULL)
3814 {
3815 vim_free(p);
3816 p = pend;
3817 }
3818#endif
3819 *mustfree = TRUE;
3820 }
3821 }
3822 }
3823
3824#ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3825 /* When there is a pathdef.c file we can use default_vim_dir and
3826 * default_vimruntime_dir */
3827 if (p == NULL)
3828 {
3829 /* Only use default_vimruntime_dir when it is not empty */
3830 if (vimruntime && *default_vimruntime_dir != NUL)
3831 {
3832 p = default_vimruntime_dir;
3833 *mustfree = FALSE;
3834 }
3835 else if (*default_vim_dir != NUL)
3836 {
3837 if (vimruntime && (p = vim_version_dir(default_vim_dir)) != NULL)
3838 *mustfree = TRUE;
3839 else
3840 {
3841 p = default_vim_dir;
3842 *mustfree = FALSE;
3843 }
3844 }
3845 }
3846#endif
3847
3848 /*
3849 * Set the environment variable, so that the new value can be found fast
3850 * next time, and others can also use it (e.g. Perl).
3851 */
3852 if (p != NULL)
3853 {
3854 if (vimruntime)
3855 {
3856 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIMRUNTIME", p);
3857 didset_vimruntime = TRUE;
3858#ifdef FEAT_GETTEXT
3859 {
Bram Moolenaard6754642005-01-17 22:18:45 +00003860 char_u *buf = concat_str(p, (char_u *)"/lang");
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003861
3862 if (buf != NULL)
3863 {
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003864 bindtextdomain(VIMPACKAGE, (char *)buf);
3865 vim_free(buf);
3866 }
3867 }
3868#endif
3869 }
3870 else
3871 {
3872 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIM", p);
3873 didset_vim = TRUE;
3874 }
3875 }
3876 return p;
3877}
3878
3879/*
3880 * Check if the directory "vimdir/<version>" or "vimdir/runtime" exists.
3881 * Return NULL if not, return its name in allocated memory otherwise.
3882 */
3883 static char_u *
3884vim_version_dir(vimdir)
3885 char_u *vimdir;
3886{
3887 char_u *p;
3888
3889 if (vimdir == NULL || *vimdir == NUL)
3890 return NULL;
3891 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT, TRUE);
3892 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3893 return p;
3894 vim_free(p);
3895 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME, TRUE);
3896 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3897 return p;
3898 vim_free(p);
3899 return NULL;
3900}
3901
3902/*
3903 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "name/", return "pend" minus
3904 * the length of "name/". Otherwise return "pend".
3905 */
3906 static char_u *
3907remove_tail(p, pend, name)
3908 char_u *p;
3909 char_u *pend;
3910 char_u *name;
3911{
3912 int len = (int)STRLEN(name) + 1;
3913 char_u *newend = pend - len;
3914
3915 if (newend >= p
3916 && fnamencmp(newend, name, len - 1) == 0
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003917 && (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend)))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003918 return newend;
3919 return pend;
3920}
3921
3922#if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
3923/*
3924 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "???.ext/", return "pend"
3925 * minus the length of "???.ext/". Otherwise return "pend".
3926 */
3927 static char_u *
3928remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend, ext)
3929 char_u *p;
3930 char_u *pend;
3931 char_u *ext;
3932{
3933 int len = (int)STRLEN(ext) + 1;
3934 char_u *newend = pend - len;
3935
3936 if (newend >= p && fnamencmp(newend, ext, len - 1) == 0)
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +00003937 while (newend > p && !after_pathsep(p, newend))
3938 mb_ptr_back(p, newend);
3939 if (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003940 return newend;
3941 return pend;
3942}
3943#endif
3944
3945/*
3946 * Call expand_env() and store the result in an allocated string.
3947 * This is not very memory efficient, this expects the result to be freed
3948 * again soon.
3949 */
3950 char_u *
3951expand_env_save(src)
3952 char_u *src;
3953{
3954 char_u *p;
3955
3956 p = alloc(MAXPATHL);
3957 if (p != NULL)
3958 expand_env(src, p, MAXPATHL);
3959 return p;
3960}
3961
3962/*
3963 * Our portable version of setenv.
3964 */
3965 void
3966vim_setenv(name, val)
3967 char_u *name;
3968 char_u *val;
3969{
3970#ifdef HAVE_SETENV
3971 mch_setenv((char *)name, (char *)val, 1);
3972#else
3973 char_u *envbuf;
3974
3975 /*
3976 * Putenv does not copy the string, it has to remain
3977 * valid. The allocated memory will never be freed.
3978 */
3979 envbuf = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(name) + STRLEN(val) + 2));
3980 if (envbuf != NULL)
3981 {
3982 sprintf((char *)envbuf, "%s=%s", name, val);
3983 putenv((char *)envbuf);
3984 }
3985#endif
3986}
3987
3988#if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO)
3989/*
3990 * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an environment variable name.
3991 */
3992/*ARGSUSED*/
3993 char_u *
3994get_env_name(xp, idx)
3995 expand_T *xp;
3996 int idx;
3997{
3998# if defined(AMIGA) || defined(__MRC__) || defined(__SC__)
3999 /*
4000 * No environ[] on the Amiga and on the Mac (using MPW).
4001 */
4002 return NULL;
4003# else
4004# ifndef __WIN32__
4005 /* Borland C++ 5.2 has this in a header file. */
4006 extern char **environ;
4007# endif
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00004008# define ENVNAMELEN 100
4009 static char_u name[ENVNAMELEN];
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004010 char_u *str;
4011 int n;
4012
4013 str = (char_u *)environ[idx];
4014 if (str == NULL)
4015 return NULL;
4016
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00004017 for (n = 0; n < ENVNAMELEN - 1; ++n)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004018 {
4019 if (str[n] == '=' || str[n] == NUL)
4020 break;
4021 name[n] = str[n];
4022 }
4023 name[n] = NUL;
4024 return name;
4025# endif
4026}
4027#endif
4028
4029/*
4030 * Replace home directory by "~" in each space or comma separated file name in
4031 * 'src'.
4032 * If anything fails (except when out of space) dst equals src.
4033 */
4034 void
4035home_replace(buf, src, dst, dstlen, one)
4036 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */
4037 char_u *src; /* input file name */
4038 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
4039 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
4040 int one; /* if TRUE, only replace one file name, include
4041 spaces and commas in the file name. */
4042{
4043 size_t dirlen = 0, envlen = 0;
4044 size_t len;
4045 char_u *homedir_env;
4046 char_u *p;
4047
4048 if (src == NULL)
4049 {
4050 *dst = NUL;
4051 return;
4052 }
4053
4054 /*
4055 * If the file is a help file, remove the path completely.
4056 */
4057 if (buf != NULL && buf->b_help)
4058 {
4059 STRCPY(dst, gettail(src));
4060 return;
4061 }
4062
4063 /*
4064 * We check both the value of the $HOME environment variable and the
4065 * "real" home directory.
4066 */
4067 if (homedir != NULL)
4068 dirlen = STRLEN(homedir);
4069
4070#ifdef VMS
4071 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
4072#else
4073 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
4074#endif
4075
4076 if (homedir_env != NULL && *homedir_env == NUL)
4077 homedir_env = NULL;
4078 if (homedir_env != NULL)
4079 envlen = STRLEN(homedir_env);
4080
4081 if (!one)
4082 src = skipwhite(src);
4083 while (*src && dstlen > 0)
4084 {
4085 /*
4086 * Here we are at the beginning of a file name.
4087 * First, check to see if the beginning of the file name matches
4088 * $HOME or the "real" home directory. Check that there is a '/'
4089 * after the match (so that if e.g. the file is "/home/pieter/bla",
4090 * and the home directory is "/home/piet", the file does not end up
4091 * as "~er/bla" (which would seem to indicate the file "bla" in user
4092 * er's home directory)).
4093 */
4094 p = homedir;
4095 len = dirlen;
4096 for (;;)
4097 {
4098 if ( len
4099 && fnamencmp(src, p, len) == 0
4100 && (vim_ispathsep(src[len])
4101 || (!one && (src[len] == ',' || src[len] == ' '))
4102 || src[len] == NUL))
4103 {
4104 src += len;
4105 if (--dstlen > 0)
4106 *dst++ = '~';
4107
4108 /*
4109 * If it's just the home directory, add "/".
4110 */
4111 if (!vim_ispathsep(src[0]) && --dstlen > 0)
4112 *dst++ = '/';
4113 break;
4114 }
4115 if (p == homedir_env)
4116 break;
4117 p = homedir_env;
4118 len = envlen;
4119 }
4120
4121 /* if (!one) skip to separator: space or comma */
4122 while (*src && (one || (*src != ',' && *src != ' ')) && --dstlen > 0)
4123 *dst++ = *src++;
4124 /* skip separator */
4125 while ((*src == ' ' || *src == ',') && --dstlen > 0)
4126 *dst++ = *src++;
4127 }
4128 /* if (dstlen == 0) out of space, what to do??? */
4129
4130 *dst = NUL;
4131}
4132
4133/*
4134 * Like home_replace, store the replaced string in allocated memory.
4135 * When something fails, NULL is returned.
4136 */
4137 char_u *
4138home_replace_save(buf, src)
4139 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */
4140 char_u *src; /* input file name */
4141{
4142 char_u *dst;
4143 unsigned len;
4144
4145 len = 3; /* space for "~/" and trailing NUL */
4146 if (src != NULL) /* just in case */
4147 len += (unsigned)STRLEN(src);
4148 dst = alloc(len);
4149 if (dst != NULL)
4150 home_replace(buf, src, dst, len, TRUE);
4151 return dst;
4152}
4153
4154/*
4155 * Compare two file names and return:
4156 * FPC_SAME if they both exist and are the same file.
4157 * FPC_SAMEX if they both don't exist and have the same file name.
4158 * FPC_DIFF if they both exist and are different files.
4159 * FPC_NOTX if they both don't exist.
4160 * FPC_DIFFX if one of them doesn't exist.
4161 * For the first name environment variables are expanded
4162 */
4163 int
4164fullpathcmp(s1, s2, checkname)
4165 char_u *s1, *s2;
4166 int checkname; /* when both don't exist, check file names */
4167{
4168#ifdef UNIX
4169 char_u exp1[MAXPATHL];
4170 char_u full1[MAXPATHL];
4171 char_u full2[MAXPATHL];
4172 struct stat st1, st2;
4173 int r1, r2;
4174
4175 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4176 r1 = mch_stat((char *)exp1, &st1);
4177 r2 = mch_stat((char *)s2, &st2);
4178 if (r1 != 0 && r2 != 0)
4179 {
4180 /* if mch_stat() doesn't work, may compare the names */
4181 if (checkname)
4182 {
4183 if (fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4184 return FPC_SAMEX;
4185 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4186 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4187 if (r1 == OK && r2 == OK && fnamecmp(full1, full2) == 0)
4188 return FPC_SAMEX;
4189 }
4190 return FPC_NOTX;
4191 }
4192 if (r1 != 0 || r2 != 0)
4193 return FPC_DIFFX;
4194 if (st1.st_dev == st2.st_dev && st1.st_ino == st2.st_ino)
4195 return FPC_SAME;
4196 return FPC_DIFF;
4197#else
4198 char_u *exp1; /* expanded s1 */
4199 char_u *full1; /* full path of s1 */
4200 char_u *full2; /* full path of s2 */
4201 int retval = FPC_DIFF;
4202 int r1, r2;
4203
4204 /* allocate one buffer to store three paths (alloc()/free() is slow!) */
4205 if ((exp1 = alloc(MAXPATHL * 3)) != NULL)
4206 {
4207 full1 = exp1 + MAXPATHL;
4208 full2 = full1 + MAXPATHL;
4209
4210 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4211 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4212 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4213
4214 /* If vim_FullName() fails, the file probably doesn't exist. */
4215 if (r1 != OK && r2 != OK)
4216 {
4217 if (checkname && fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4218 retval = FPC_SAMEX;
4219 else
4220 retval = FPC_NOTX;
4221 }
4222 else if (r1 != OK || r2 != OK)
4223 retval = FPC_DIFFX;
4224 else if (fnamecmp(full1, full2))
4225 retval = FPC_DIFF;
4226 else
4227 retval = FPC_SAME;
4228 vim_free(exp1);
4229 }
4230 return retval;
4231#endif
4232}
4233
4234/*
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004235 * Get the tail of a path: the file name.
4236 * Fail safe: never returns NULL.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004237 */
4238 char_u *
4239gettail(fname)
4240 char_u *fname;
4241{
4242 char_u *p1, *p2;
4243
4244 if (fname == NULL)
4245 return (char_u *)"";
4246 for (p1 = p2 = fname; *p2; ) /* find last part of path */
4247 {
4248 if (vim_ispathsep(*p2))
4249 p1 = p2 + 1;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004250 mb_ptr_adv(p2);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004251 }
4252 return p1;
4253}
4254
4255/*
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004256 * Get pointer to tail of "fname", including path separators. Putting a NUL
4257 * here leaves the directory name. Takes care of "c:/" and "//".
4258 * Always returns a valid pointer.
4259 */
4260 char_u *
4261gettail_sep(fname)
4262 char_u *fname;
4263{
4264 char_u *p;
4265 char_u *t;
4266
4267 p = get_past_head(fname); /* don't remove the '/' from "c:/file" */
4268 t = gettail(fname);
4269 while (t > p && after_pathsep(fname, t))
4270 --t;
4271#ifdef VMS
4272 /* path separator is part of the path */
4273 ++t;
4274#endif
4275 return t;
4276}
4277
4278/*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004279 * get the next path component (just after the next path separator).
4280 */
4281 char_u *
4282getnextcomp(fname)
4283 char_u *fname;
4284{
4285 while (*fname && !vim_ispathsep(*fname))
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004286 mb_ptr_adv(fname);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004287 if (*fname)
4288 ++fname;
4289 return fname;
4290}
4291
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004292/*
4293 * Get a pointer to one character past the head of a path name.
4294 * Unix: after "/"; DOS: after "c:\"; Amiga: after "disk:/"; Mac: no head.
4295 * If there is no head, path is returned.
4296 */
4297 char_u *
4298get_past_head(path)
4299 char_u *path;
4300{
4301 char_u *retval;
4302
4303#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
4304 /* may skip "c:" */
4305 if (isalpha(path[0]) && path[1] == ':')
4306 retval = path + 2;
4307 else
4308 retval = path;
4309#else
4310# if defined(AMIGA)
4311 /* may skip "label:" */
4312 retval = vim_strchr(path, ':');
4313 if (retval == NULL)
4314 retval = path;
4315# else /* Unix */
4316 retval = path;
4317# endif
4318#endif
4319
4320 while (vim_ispathsep(*retval))
4321 ++retval;
4322
4323 return retval;
4324}
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004325
4326/*
4327 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path separator.
4328 */
4329 int
4330vim_ispathsep(c)
4331 int c;
4332{
4333#ifdef RISCOS
4334 return (c == '.' || c == ':');
4335#else
4336# ifdef UNIX
4337 return (c == '/'); /* UNIX has ':' inside file names */
4338# else
4339# ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
4340 return (c == ':' || c == '/' || c == '\\');
4341# else
4342# ifdef VMS
4343 /* server"user passwd"::device:[full.path.name]fname.extension;version" */
4344 return (c == ':' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '/'
4345 || c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '"' );
4346# else
4347# ifdef COLON_AS_PATHSEP
4348 return (c == ':');
4349# else /* Amiga */
4350 return (c == ':' || c == '/');
4351# endif
4352# endif /* VMS */
4353# endif
4354# endif
4355#endif /* RISC OS */
4356}
4357
4358#if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(PROTO)
4359/*
4360 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path list separator.
4361 */
4362 int
4363vim_ispathlistsep(c)
4364 int c;
4365{
4366#ifdef UNIX
4367 return (c == ':');
4368#else
4369 return (c == ';'); /* might not be rigth for every system... */
4370#endif
4371}
4372#endif
4373
4374#if (defined(CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME) && defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME)) \
4375 || defined(PROTO)
4376/*
4377 * Versions of fnamecmp() and fnamencmp() that handle '/' and '\' equally.
4378 */
4379 int
4380vim_fnamecmp(x, y)
4381 char_u *x, *y;
4382{
4383 return vim_fnamencmp(x, y, MAXPATHL);
4384}
4385
4386 int
4387vim_fnamencmp(x, y, len)
4388 char_u *x, *y;
4389 size_t len;
4390{
4391 while (len > 0 && *x && *y)
4392 {
4393 if (TOLOWER_LOC(*x) != TOLOWER_LOC(*y)
4394 && !(*x == '/' && *y == '\\')
4395 && !(*x == '\\' && *y == '/'))
4396 break;
4397 ++x;
4398 ++y;
4399 --len;
4400 }
4401 if (len == 0)
4402 return 0;
4403 return (*x - *y);
4404}
4405#endif
4406
4407/*
4408 * Concatenate file names fname1 and fname2 into allocated memory.
4409 * Only add a '/' or '\\' when 'sep' is TRUE and it is neccesary.
4410 */
4411 char_u *
4412concat_fnames(fname1, fname2, sep)
4413 char_u *fname1;
4414 char_u *fname2;
4415 int sep;
4416{
4417 char_u *dest;
4418
4419 dest = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(fname1) + STRLEN(fname2) + 3));
4420 if (dest != NULL)
4421 {
4422 STRCPY(dest, fname1);
4423 if (sep)
4424 add_pathsep(dest);
4425 STRCAT(dest, fname2);
4426 }
4427 return dest;
4428}
4429
Bram Moolenaard6754642005-01-17 22:18:45 +00004430#if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(FEAT_GETTEXT) || defined(PROTO)
4431/*
4432 * Concatenate two strings and return the result in allocated memory.
4433 * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4434 */
4435 char_u *
4436concat_str(str1, str2)
4437 char_u *str1;
4438 char_u *str2;
4439{
4440 char_u *dest;
4441 size_t l = STRLEN(str1);
4442
4443 dest = alloc((unsigned)(l + STRLEN(str2) + 1L));
4444 if (dest != NULL)
4445 {
4446 STRCPY(dest, str1);
4447 STRCPY(dest + l, str2);
4448 }
4449 return dest;
4450}
4451#endif
4452
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004453/*
4454 * Add a path separator to a file name, unless it already ends in a path
4455 * separator.
4456 */
4457 void
4458add_pathsep(p)
4459 char_u *p;
4460{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004461 if (*p != NUL && !after_pathsep(p, p + STRLEN(p)))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004462 STRCAT(p, PATHSEPSTR);
4463}
4464
4465/*
4466 * FullName_save - Make an allocated copy of a full file name.
4467 * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4468 */
4469 char_u *
4470FullName_save(fname, force)
4471 char_u *fname;
4472 int force; /* force expansion, even when it already looks
4473 like a full path name */
4474{
4475 char_u *buf;
4476 char_u *new_fname = NULL;
4477
4478 if (fname == NULL)
4479 return NULL;
4480
4481 buf = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL);
4482 if (buf != NULL)
4483 {
4484 if (vim_FullName(fname, buf, MAXPATHL, force) != FAIL)
4485 new_fname = vim_strsave(buf);
4486 else
4487 new_fname = vim_strsave(fname);
4488 vim_free(buf);
4489 }
4490 return new_fname;
4491}
4492
4493#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SYN_HL)
4494
4495static char_u *skip_string __ARGS((char_u *p));
4496
4497/*
4498 * Find the start of a comment, not knowing if we are in a comment right now.
4499 * Search starts at w_cursor.lnum and goes backwards.
4500 */
4501 pos_T *
4502find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
4503 int ind_maxcomment;
4504{
4505 pos_T *pos;
4506 char_u *line;
4507 char_u *p;
4508
4509 if ((pos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '*', FM_BACKWARD, ind_maxcomment)) == NULL)
4510 return NULL;
4511
4512 /*
4513 * Check if the comment start we found is inside a string.
4514 */
4515 line = ml_get(pos->lnum);
4516 for (p = line; *p && (unsigned)(p - line) < pos->col; ++p)
4517 p = skip_string(p);
4518 if ((unsigned)(p - line) > pos->col)
4519 return NULL;
4520 return pos;
4521}
4522
4523/*
4524 * Skip to the end of a "string" and a 'c' character.
4525 * If there is no string or character, return argument unmodified.
4526 */
4527 static char_u *
4528skip_string(p)
4529 char_u *p;
4530{
4531 int i;
4532
4533 /*
4534 * We loop, because strings may be concatenated: "date""time".
4535 */
4536 for ( ; ; ++p)
4537 {
4538 if (p[0] == '\'') /* 'c' or '\n' or '\000' */
4539 {
4540 if (!p[1]) /* ' at end of line */
4541 break;
4542 i = 2;
4543 if (p[1] == '\\') /* '\n' or '\000' */
4544 {
4545 ++i;
4546 while (vim_isdigit(p[i - 1])) /* '\000' */
4547 ++i;
4548 }
4549 if (p[i] == '\'') /* check for trailing ' */
4550 {
4551 p += i;
4552 continue;
4553 }
4554 }
4555 else if (p[0] == '"') /* start of string */
4556 {
4557 for (++p; p[0]; ++p)
4558 {
4559 if (p[0] == '\\' && p[1] != NUL)
4560 ++p;
4561 else if (p[0] == '"') /* end of string */
4562 break;
4563 }
4564 if (p[0] == '"')
4565 continue;
4566 }
4567 break; /* no string found */
4568 }
4569 if (!*p)
4570 --p; /* backup from NUL */
4571 return p;
4572}
4573#endif /* FEAT_CINDENT || FEAT_SYN_HL */
4574
4575#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(PROTO)
4576
4577/*
4578 * Do C or expression indenting on the current line.
4579 */
4580 void
4581do_c_expr_indent()
4582{
4583# ifdef FEAT_EVAL
4584 if (*curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL)
4585 fixthisline(get_expr_indent);
4586 else
4587# endif
4588 fixthisline(get_c_indent);
4589}
4590
4591/*
4592 * Functions for C-indenting.
4593 * Most of this originally comes from Eric Fischer.
4594 */
4595/*
4596 * Below "XXX" means that this function may unlock the current line.
4597 */
4598
4599static char_u *cin_skipcomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4600static int cin_nocode __ARGS((char_u *));
4601static pos_T *find_line_comment __ARGS((void));
4602static int cin_islabel_skip __ARGS((char_u **));
4603static int cin_isdefault __ARGS((char_u *));
4604static char_u *after_label __ARGS((char_u *l));
4605static int get_indent_nolabel __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4606static int skip_label __ARGS((linenr_T, char_u **pp, int ind_maxcomment));
4607static int cin_first_id_amount __ARGS((void));
4608static int cin_get_equal_amount __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4609static int cin_ispreproc __ARGS((char_u *));
4610static int cin_ispreproc_cont __ARGS((char_u **pp, linenr_T *lnump));
4611static int cin_iscomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4612static int cin_islinecomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4613static int cin_isterminated __ARGS((char_u *, int, int));
4614static int cin_isinit __ARGS((void));
4615static int cin_isfuncdecl __ARGS((char_u **, linenr_T));
4616static int cin_isif __ARGS((char_u *));
4617static int cin_iselse __ARGS((char_u *));
4618static int cin_isdo __ARGS((char_u *));
4619static int cin_iswhileofdo __ARGS((char_u *, linenr_T, int));
4620static int cin_isbreak __ARGS((char_u *));
4621static int cin_is_cpp_baseclass __ARGS((char_u *line, colnr_T *col));
4622static int cin_ends_in __ARGS((char_u *, char_u *, char_u *));
4623static int cin_skip2pos __ARGS((pos_T *trypos));
4624static pos_T *find_start_brace __ARGS((int));
4625static pos_T *find_match_paren __ARGS((int, int));
4626static int corr_ind_maxparen __ARGS((int ind_maxparen, pos_T *startpos));
4627static int find_last_paren __ARGS((char_u *l, int start, int end));
4628static int find_match __ARGS((int lookfor, linenr_T ourscope, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment));
4629
4630/*
4631 * Skip over white space and C comments within the line.
4632 */
4633 static char_u *
4634cin_skipcomment(s)
4635 char_u *s;
4636{
4637 while (*s)
4638 {
4639 s = skipwhite(s);
4640 if (*s != '/')
4641 break;
4642 ++s;
4643 if (*s == '/') /* slash-slash comment continues till eol */
4644 {
4645 s += STRLEN(s);
4646 break;
4647 }
4648 if (*s != '*')
4649 break;
4650 for (++s; *s; ++s) /* skip slash-star comment */
4651 if (s[0] == '*' && s[1] == '/')
4652 {
4653 s += 2;
4654 break;
4655 }
4656 }
4657 return s;
4658}
4659
4660/*
4661 * Return TRUE if there there is no code at *s. White space and comments are
4662 * not considered code.
4663 */
4664 static int
4665cin_nocode(s)
4666 char_u *s;
4667{
4668 return *cin_skipcomment(s) == NUL;
4669}
4670
4671/*
4672 * Check previous lines for a "//" line comment, skipping over blank lines.
4673 */
4674 static pos_T *
4675find_line_comment() /* XXX */
4676{
4677 static pos_T pos;
4678 char_u *line;
4679 char_u *p;
4680
4681 pos = curwin->w_cursor;
4682 while (--pos.lnum > 0)
4683 {
4684 line = ml_get(pos.lnum);
4685 p = skipwhite(line);
4686 if (cin_islinecomment(p))
4687 {
4688 pos.col = (int)(p - line);
4689 return &pos;
4690 }
4691 if (*p != NUL)
4692 break;
4693 }
4694 return NULL;
4695}
4696
4697/*
4698 * Check if string matches "label:"; move to character after ':' if true.
4699 */
4700 static int
4701cin_islabel_skip(s)
4702 char_u **s;
4703{
4704 if (!vim_isIDc(**s)) /* need at least one ID character */
4705 return FALSE;
4706
4707 while (vim_isIDc(**s))
4708 (*s)++;
4709
4710 *s = cin_skipcomment(*s);
4711
4712 /* "::" is not a label, it's C++ */
4713 return (**s == ':' && *++*s != ':');
4714}
4715
4716/*
4717 * Recognize a label: "label:".
4718 * Note: curwin->w_cursor must be where we are looking for the label.
4719 */
4720 int
4721cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
4722 int ind_maxcomment;
4723{
4724 char_u *s;
4725
4726 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4727
4728 /*
4729 * Exclude "default" from labels, since it should be indented
4730 * like a switch label. Same for C++ scope declarations.
4731 */
4732 if (cin_isdefault(s))
4733 return FALSE;
4734 if (cin_isscopedecl(s))
4735 return FALSE;
4736
4737 if (cin_islabel_skip(&s))
4738 {
4739 /*
4740 * Only accept a label if the previous line is terminated or is a case
4741 * label.
4742 */
4743 pos_T cursor_save;
4744 pos_T *trypos;
4745 char_u *line;
4746
4747 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
4748 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
4749 {
4750 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
4751
4752 /*
4753 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
4754 */
4755 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
4756 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
4757 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
4758
4759 line = ml_get_curline();
4760 if (cin_ispreproc(line)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
4761 continue;
4762 if (*(line = cin_skipcomment(line)) == NUL)
4763 continue;
4764
4765 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4766 if (cin_isterminated(line, TRUE, FALSE)
4767 || cin_isscopedecl(line)
4768 || cin_iscase(line)
4769 || (cin_islabel_skip(&line) && cin_nocode(line)))
4770 return TRUE;
4771 return FALSE;
4772 }
4773 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4774 return TRUE; /* label at start of file??? */
4775 }
4776 return FALSE;
4777}
4778
4779/*
4780 * Recognize structure initialization and enumerations.
4781 * Q&D-Implementation:
4782 * check for "=" at end or "[typedef] enum" at beginning of line.
4783 */
4784 static int
4785cin_isinit(void)
4786{
4787 char_u *s;
4788
4789 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4790
4791 if (STRNCMP(s, "typedef", 7) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[7]))
4792 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7);
4793
4794 if (STRNCMP(s, "enum", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4795 return TRUE;
4796
4797 if (cin_ends_in(s, (char_u *)"=", (char_u *)"{"))
4798 return TRUE;
4799
4800 return FALSE;
4801}
4802
4803/*
4804 * Recognize a switch label: "case .*:" or "default:".
4805 */
4806 int
4807cin_iscase(s)
4808 char_u *s;
4809{
4810 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4811 if (STRNCMP(s, "case", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4812 {
4813 for (s += 4; *s; ++s)
4814 {
4815 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4816 if (*s == ':')
4817 {
4818 if (s[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */
4819 ++s;
4820 else
4821 return TRUE;
4822 }
4823 if (*s == '\'' && s[1] && s[2] == '\'')
4824 s += 2; /* skip over '.' */
4825 else if (*s == '/' && (s[1] == '*' || s[1] == '/'))
4826 return FALSE; /* stop at comment */
4827 else if (*s == '"')
4828 return FALSE; /* stop at string */
4829 }
4830 return FALSE;
4831 }
4832
4833 if (cin_isdefault(s))
4834 return TRUE;
4835 return FALSE;
4836}
4837
4838/*
4839 * Recognize a "default" switch label.
4840 */
4841 static int
4842cin_isdefault(s)
4843 char_u *s;
4844{
4845 return (STRNCMP(s, "default", 7) == 0
4846 && *(s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7)) == ':'
4847 && s[1] != ':');
4848}
4849
4850/*
4851 * Recognize a "public/private/proctected" scope declaration label.
4852 */
4853 int
4854cin_isscopedecl(s)
4855 char_u *s;
4856{
4857 int i;
4858
4859 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4860 if (STRNCMP(s, "public", 6) == 0)
4861 i = 6;
4862 else if (STRNCMP(s, "protected", 9) == 0)
4863 i = 9;
4864 else if (STRNCMP(s, "private", 7) == 0)
4865 i = 7;
4866 else
4867 return FALSE;
4868 return (*(s = cin_skipcomment(s + i)) == ':' && s[1] != ':');
4869}
4870
4871/*
4872 * Return a pointer to the first non-empty non-comment character after a ':'.
4873 * Return NULL if not found.
4874 * case 234: a = b;
4875 * ^
4876 */
4877 static char_u *
4878after_label(l)
4879 char_u *l;
4880{
4881 for ( ; *l; ++l)
4882 {
4883 if (*l == ':')
4884 {
4885 if (l[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */
4886 ++l;
4887 else if (!cin_iscase(l + 1))
4888 break;
4889 }
4890 else if (*l == '\'' && l[1] && l[2] == '\'')
4891 l += 2; /* skip over 'x' */
4892 }
4893 if (*l == NUL)
4894 return NULL;
4895 l = cin_skipcomment(l + 1);
4896 if (*l == NUL)
4897 return NULL;
4898 return l;
4899}
4900
4901/*
4902 * Get indent of line "lnum", skipping a label.
4903 * Return 0 if there is nothing after the label.
4904 */
4905 static int
4906get_indent_nolabel(lnum) /* XXX */
4907 linenr_T lnum;
4908{
4909 char_u *l;
4910 pos_T fp;
4911 colnr_T col;
4912 char_u *p;
4913
4914 l = ml_get(lnum);
4915 p = after_label(l);
4916 if (p == NULL)
4917 return 0;
4918
4919 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - l);
4920 fp.lnum = lnum;
4921 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
4922 return (int)col;
4923}
4924
4925/*
4926 * Find indent for line "lnum", ignoring any case or jump label.
4927 * Also return a pointer to the text (after the label).
4928 * label: if (asdf && asdfasdf)
4929 * ^
4930 */
4931 static int
4932skip_label(lnum, pp, ind_maxcomment)
4933 linenr_T lnum;
4934 char_u **pp;
4935 int ind_maxcomment;
4936{
4937 char_u *l;
4938 int amount;
4939 pos_T cursor_save;
4940
4941 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
4942 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
4943 l = ml_get_curline();
4944 /* XXX */
4945 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l) || cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
4946 {
4947 amount = get_indent_nolabel(lnum);
4948 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
4949 if (l == NULL) /* just in case */
4950 l = ml_get_curline();
4951 }
4952 else
4953 {
4954 amount = get_indent();
4955 l = ml_get_curline();
4956 }
4957 *pp = l;
4958
4959 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4960 return amount;
4961}
4962
4963/*
4964 * Return the indent of the first variable name after a type in a declaration.
4965 * int a, indent of "a"
4966 * static struct foo b, indent of "b"
4967 * enum bla c, indent of "c"
4968 * Returns zero when it doesn't look like a declaration.
4969 */
4970 static int
4971cin_first_id_amount()
4972{
4973 char_u *line, *p, *s;
4974 int len;
4975 pos_T fp;
4976 colnr_T col;
4977
4978 line = ml_get_curline();
4979 p = skipwhite(line);
4980 len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
4981 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "static", 6) == 0)
4982 {
4983 p = skipwhite(p + 6);
4984 len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
4985 }
4986 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "struct", 6) == 0)
4987 p = skipwhite(p + 6);
4988 else if (len == 4 && STRNCMP(p, "enum", 4) == 0)
4989 p = skipwhite(p + 4);
4990 else if ((len == 8 && STRNCMP(p, "unsigned", 8) == 0)
4991 || (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "signed", 6) == 0))
4992 {
4993 s = skipwhite(p + len);
4994 if ((STRNCMP(s, "int", 3) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[3]))
4995 || (STRNCMP(s, "long", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4]))
4996 || (STRNCMP(s, "short", 5) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[5]))
4997 || (STRNCMP(s, "char", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4])))
4998 p = s;
4999 }
5000 for (len = 0; vim_isIDc(p[len]); ++len)
5001 ;
5002 if (len == 0 || !vim_iswhite(p[len]) || cin_nocode(p))
5003 return 0;
5004
5005 p = skipwhite(p + len);
5006 fp.lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5007 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - line);
5008 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5009 return (int)col;
5010}
5011
5012/*
5013 * Return the indent of the first non-blank after an equal sign.
5014 * char *foo = "here";
5015 * Return zero if no (useful) equal sign found.
5016 * Return -1 if the line above "lnum" ends in a backslash.
5017 * foo = "asdf\
5018 * asdf\
5019 * here";
5020 */
5021 static int
5022cin_get_equal_amount(lnum)
5023 linenr_T lnum;
5024{
5025 char_u *line;
5026 char_u *s;
5027 colnr_T col;
5028 pos_T fp;
5029
5030 if (lnum > 1)
5031 {
5032 line = ml_get(lnum - 1);
5033 if (*line != NUL && line[STRLEN(line) - 1] == '\\')
5034 return -1;
5035 }
5036
5037 line = s = ml_get(lnum);
5038 while (*s != NUL && vim_strchr((char_u *)"=;{}\"'", *s) == NULL)
5039 {
5040 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5041 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5042 else
5043 ++s;
5044 }
5045 if (*s != '=')
5046 return 0;
5047
5048 s = skipwhite(s + 1);
5049 if (cin_nocode(s))
5050 return 0;
5051
5052 if (*s == '"') /* nice alignment for continued strings */
5053 ++s;
5054
5055 fp.lnum = lnum;
5056 fp.col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5057 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5058 return (int)col;
5059}
5060
5061/*
5062 * Recognize a preprocessor statement: Any line that starts with '#'.
5063 */
5064 static int
5065cin_ispreproc(s)
5066 char_u *s;
5067{
5068 s = skipwhite(s);
5069 if (*s == '#')
5070 return TRUE;
5071 return FALSE;
5072}
5073
5074/*
5075 * Return TRUE if line "*pp" at "*lnump" is a preprocessor statement or a
5076 * continuation line of a preprocessor statement. Decrease "*lnump" to the
5077 * start and return the line in "*pp".
5078 */
5079 static int
5080cin_ispreproc_cont(pp, lnump)
5081 char_u **pp;
5082 linenr_T *lnump;
5083{
5084 char_u *line = *pp;
5085 linenr_T lnum = *lnump;
5086 int retval = FALSE;
5087
5088 while (1)
5089 {
5090 if (cin_ispreproc(line))
5091 {
5092 retval = TRUE;
5093 *lnump = lnum;
5094 break;
5095 }
5096 if (lnum == 1)
5097 break;
5098 line = ml_get(--lnum);
5099 if (*line == NUL || line[STRLEN(line) - 1] != '\\')
5100 break;
5101 }
5102
5103 if (lnum != *lnump)
5104 *pp = ml_get(*lnump);
5105 return retval;
5106}
5107
5108/*
5109 * Recognize the start of a C or C++ comment.
5110 */
5111 static int
5112cin_iscomment(p)
5113 char_u *p;
5114{
5115 return (p[0] == '/' && (p[1] == '*' || p[1] == '/'));
5116}
5117
5118/*
5119 * Recognize the start of a "//" comment.
5120 */
5121 static int
5122cin_islinecomment(p)
5123 char_u *p;
5124{
5125 return (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '/');
5126}
5127
5128/*
5129 * Recognize a line that starts with '{' or '}', or ends with ';', '{' or '}'.
5130 * Don't consider "} else" a terminated line.
5131 * Return the character terminating the line (ending char's have precedence if
5132 * both apply in order to determine initializations).
5133 */
5134 static int
5135cin_isterminated(s, incl_open, incl_comma)
5136 char_u *s;
5137 int incl_open; /* include '{' at the end as terminator */
5138 int incl_comma; /* recognize a trailing comma */
5139{
5140 char_u found_start = 0;
5141
5142 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5143
5144 if (*s == '{' || (*s == '}' && !cin_iselse(s)))
5145 found_start = *s;
5146
5147 while (*s)
5148 {
5149 /* skip over comments, "" strings and 'c'haracters */
5150 s = skip_string(cin_skipcomment(s));
5151 if ((*s == ';' || (incl_open && *s == '{') || *s == '}'
5152 || (incl_comma && *s == ','))
5153 && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5154 return *s;
5155
5156 if (*s)
5157 s++;
5158 }
5159 return found_start;
5160}
5161
5162/*
5163 * Recognize the basic picture of a function declaration -- it needs to
5164 * have an open paren somewhere and a close paren at the end of the line and
5165 * no semicolons anywhere.
5166 * When a line ends in a comma we continue looking in the next line.
5167 * "sp" points to a string with the line. When looking at other lines it must
5168 * be restored to the line. When it's NULL fetch lines here.
5169 * "lnum" is where we start looking.
5170 */
5171 static int
5172cin_isfuncdecl(sp, first_lnum)
5173 char_u **sp;
5174 linenr_T first_lnum;
5175{
5176 char_u *s;
5177 linenr_T lnum = first_lnum;
5178 int retval = FALSE;
5179
5180 if (sp == NULL)
5181 s = ml_get(lnum);
5182 else
5183 s = *sp;
5184
5185 while (*s && *s != '(' && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5186 {
5187 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5188 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5189 else
5190 ++s;
5191 }
5192 if (*s != '(')
5193 return FALSE; /* ';', ' or " before any () or no '(' */
5194
5195 while (*s && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5196 {
5197 if (*s == ')' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5198 {
5199 /* ')' at the end: may have found a match
5200 * Check for he previous line not to end in a backslash:
5201 * #if defined(x) && \
5202 * defined(y)
5203 */
5204 lnum = first_lnum - 1;
5205 s = ml_get(lnum);
5206 if (*s == NUL || s[STRLEN(s) - 1] != '\\')
5207 retval = TRUE;
5208 goto done;
5209 }
5210 if (*s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5211 {
5212 /* ',' at the end: continue looking in the next line */
5213 if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
5214 break;
5215
5216 s = ml_get(++lnum);
5217 }
5218 else if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5219 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5220 else
5221 ++s;
5222 }
5223
5224done:
5225 if (lnum != first_lnum && sp != NULL)
5226 *sp = ml_get(first_lnum);
5227
5228 return retval;
5229}
5230
5231 static int
5232cin_isif(p)
5233 char_u *p;
5234{
5235 return (STRNCMP(p, "if", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5236}
5237
5238 static int
5239cin_iselse(p)
5240 char_u *p;
5241{
5242 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} else" */
5243 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5244 return (STRNCMP(p, "else", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[4]));
5245}
5246
5247 static int
5248cin_isdo(p)
5249 char_u *p;
5250{
5251 return (STRNCMP(p, "do", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5252}
5253
5254/*
5255 * Check if this is a "while" that should have a matching "do".
5256 * We only accept a "while (condition) ;", with only white space between the
5257 * ')' and ';'. The condition may be spread over several lines.
5258 */
5259 static int
5260cin_iswhileofdo(p, lnum, ind_maxparen) /* XXX */
5261 char_u *p;
5262 linenr_T lnum;
5263 int ind_maxparen;
5264{
5265 pos_T cursor_save;
5266 pos_T *trypos;
5267 int retval = FALSE;
5268
5269 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5270 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} while (cond);" */
5271 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5272 if (STRNCMP(p, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]))
5273 {
5274 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5275 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5276 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5277 p = ml_get_curline();
5278 while (*p && *p != 'w') /* skip any '}', until the 'w' of the "while" */
5279 {
5280 ++p;
5281 ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
5282 }
5283 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, 0, 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL
5284 && *cin_skipcomment(ml_get_pos(trypos) + 1) == ';')
5285 retval = TRUE;
5286 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5287 }
5288 return retval;
5289}
5290
5291 static int
5292cin_isbreak(p)
5293 char_u *p;
5294{
5295 return (STRNCMP(p, "break", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]));
5296}
5297
5298/* Find the position of a C++ base-class declaration or
5299 * constructor-initialization. eg:
5300 *
5301 * class MyClass :
5302 * baseClass <-- here
5303 * class MyClass : public baseClass,
5304 * anotherBaseClass <-- here (should probably lineup ??)
5305 * MyClass::MyClass(...) :
5306 * baseClass(...) <-- here (constructor-initialization)
5307 */
5308 static int
5309cin_is_cpp_baseclass(line, col)
5310 char_u *line;
5311 colnr_T *col;
5312{
5313 char_u *s;
5314 int class_or_struct, lookfor_ctor_init, cpp_base_class;
5315
5316 *col = 0;
5317
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00005318 s = skipwhite(line);
5319 if (*s == '#') /* skip #define FOO x ? (x) : x */
5320 return FALSE;
5321 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005322 if (*s == NUL)
5323 return FALSE;
5324
5325 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5326
5327 while(*s != NUL)
5328 {
5329 if (s[0] == ':')
5330 {
5331 if (s[1] == ':')
5332 {
5333 /* skip double colon. It can't be a constructor
5334 * initialization any more */
5335 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5336 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 2);
5337 }
5338 else if (lookfor_ctor_init || class_or_struct)
5339 {
5340 /* we have something found, that looks like the start of
5341 * cpp-base-class-declaration or contructor-initialization */
5342 cpp_base_class = TRUE;
5343 lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5344 *col = 0;
5345 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5346 }
5347 else
5348 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5349 }
5350 else if ((STRNCMP(s, "class", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5]))
5351 || (STRNCMP(s, "struct", 6) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[6])))
5352 {
5353 class_or_struct = TRUE;
5354 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5355
5356 if (*s == 'c')
5357 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 5);
5358 else
5359 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 6);
5360 }
5361 else
5362 {
5363 if (s[0] == '{' || s[0] == '}' || s[0] == ';')
5364 {
5365 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5366 }
5367 else if (s[0] == ')')
5368 {
5369 /* Constructor-initialization is assumed if we come across
5370 * something like "):" */
5371 class_or_struct = FALSE;
5372 lookfor_ctor_init = TRUE;
5373 }
5374 else if (!vim_isIDc(s[0]))
5375 {
5376 /* if it is not an identifier, we are wrong */
5377 class_or_struct = FALSE;
5378 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5379 }
5380 else if (*col == 0)
5381 {
5382 /* it can't be a constructor-initialization any more */
5383 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5384
5385 /* the first statement starts here: lineup with this one... */
5386 if (cpp_base_class && *col == 0)
5387 *col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5388 }
5389
5390 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5391 }
5392 }
5393
5394 return cpp_base_class;
5395}
5396
5397/*
5398 * Return TRUE if string "s" ends with the string "find", possibly followed by
5399 * white space and comments. Skip strings and comments.
5400 * Ignore "ignore" after "find" if it's not NULL.
5401 */
5402 static int
5403cin_ends_in(s, find, ignore)
5404 char_u *s;
5405 char_u *find;
5406 char_u *ignore;
5407{
5408 char_u *p = s;
5409 char_u *r;
5410 int len = (int)STRLEN(find);
5411
5412 while (*p != NUL)
5413 {
5414 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5415 if (STRNCMP(p, find, len) == 0)
5416 {
5417 r = skipwhite(p + len);
5418 if (ignore != NULL && STRNCMP(r, ignore, STRLEN(ignore)) == 0)
5419 r = skipwhite(r + STRLEN(ignore));
5420 if (cin_nocode(r))
5421 return TRUE;
5422 }
5423 if (*p != NUL)
5424 ++p;
5425 }
5426 return FALSE;
5427}
5428
5429/*
5430 * Skip strings, chars and comments until at or past "trypos".
5431 * Return the column found.
5432 */
5433 static int
5434cin_skip2pos(trypos)
5435 pos_T *trypos;
5436{
5437 char_u *line;
5438 char_u *p;
5439
5440 p = line = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
5441 while (*p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < trypos->col)
5442 {
5443 if (cin_iscomment(p))
5444 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5445 else
5446 {
5447 p = skip_string(p);
5448 ++p;
5449 }
5450 }
5451 return (int)(p - line);
5452}
5453
5454/*
5455 * Find the '{' at the start of the block we are in.
5456 * Return NULL if no match found.
5457 * Ignore a '{' that is in a comment, makes indenting the next three lines
5458 * work. */
5459/* foo() */
5460/* { */
5461/* } */
5462
5463 static pos_T *
5464find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
5465 int ind_maxcomment;
5466{
5467 pos_T cursor_save;
5468 pos_T *trypos;
5469 pos_T *pos;
5470 static pos_T pos_copy;
5471
5472 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5473 while ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '{', FM_BLOCKSTOP, 0)) != NULL)
5474 {
5475 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy pos_T, next findmatch will change it */
5476 trypos = &pos_copy;
5477 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5478 pos = NULL;
5479 /* ignore the { if it's in a // comment */
5480 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) == trypos->col
5481 && (pos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) /* XXX */
5482 break;
5483 if (pos != NULL)
5484 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
5485 }
5486 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5487 return trypos;
5488}
5489
5490/*
5491 * Find the matching '(', failing if it is in a comment.
5492 * Return NULL of no match found.
5493 */
5494 static pos_T *
5495find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
5496 int ind_maxparen;
5497 int ind_maxcomment;
5498{
5499 pos_T cursor_save;
5500 pos_T *trypos;
5501 static pos_T pos_copy;
5502
5503 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5504 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '(', 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL)
5505 {
5506 /* check if the ( is in a // comment */
5507 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) > trypos->col)
5508 trypos = NULL;
5509 else
5510 {
5511 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy trypos, findmatch will change it */
5512 trypos = &pos_copy;
5513 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5514 if (find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) != NULL) /* XXX */
5515 trypos = NULL;
5516 }
5517 }
5518 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5519 return trypos;
5520}
5521
5522/*
5523 * Return ind_maxparen corrected for the difference in line number between the
5524 * cursor position and "startpos". This makes sure that searching for a
5525 * matching paren above the cursor line doesn't find a match because of
5526 * looking a few lines further.
5527 */
5528 static int
5529corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, startpos)
5530 int ind_maxparen;
5531 pos_T *startpos;
5532{
5533 long n = (long)startpos->lnum - (long)curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5534
5535 if (n > 0 && n < ind_maxparen / 2)
5536 return ind_maxparen - (int)n;
5537 return ind_maxparen;
5538}
5539
5540/*
5541 * Set w_cursor.col to the column number of the last unmatched ')' or '{' in
5542 * line "l".
5543 */
5544 static int
5545find_last_paren(l, start, end)
5546 char_u *l;
5547 int start, end;
5548{
5549 int i;
5550 int retval = FALSE;
5551 int open_count = 0;
5552
5553 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; /* default is start of line */
5554
5555 for (i = 0; l[i]; i++)
5556 {
5557 i = (int)(cin_skipcomment(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in comments */
5558 i = (int)(skip_string(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in quotes */
5559 if (l[i] == start)
5560 ++open_count;
5561 else if (l[i] == end)
5562 {
5563 if (open_count > 0)
5564 --open_count;
5565 else
5566 {
5567 curwin->w_cursor.col = i;
5568 retval = TRUE;
5569 }
5570 }
5571 }
5572 return retval;
5573}
5574
5575 int
5576get_c_indent()
5577{
5578 /*
5579 * spaces from a block's opening brace the prevailing indent for that
5580 * block should be
5581 */
5582 int ind_level = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5583
5584 /*
5585 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace that's at the end of a
5586 * line is imagined to be.
5587 */
5588 int ind_open_imag = 0;
5589
5590 /*
5591 * spaces from the prevailing indent for a line that is not precededof by
5592 * an opening brace.
5593 */
5594 int ind_no_brace = 0;
5595
5596 /*
5597 * column where the first { of a function should be located }
5598 */
5599 int ind_first_open = 0;
5600
5601 /*
5602 * spaces from the prevailing indent a leftmost open brace should be
5603 * located
5604 */
5605 int ind_open_extra = 0;
5606
5607 /*
5608 * spaces from the matching open brace (real location for one at the left
5609 * edge; imaginary location from one that ends a line) the matching close
5610 * brace should be located
5611 */
5612 int ind_close_extra = 0;
5613
5614 /*
5615 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace sitting in the leftmost
5616 * column is imagined to be
5617 */
5618 int ind_open_left_imag = 0;
5619
5620 /*
5621 * spaces from the switch() indent a "case xx" label should be located
5622 */
5623 int ind_case = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5624
5625 /*
5626 * spaces from the "case xx:" code after a switch() should be located
5627 */
5628 int ind_case_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5629
5630 /*
5631 * lineup break at end of case in switch() with case label
5632 */
5633 int ind_case_break = 0;
5634
5635 /*
5636 * spaces from the class declaration indent a scope declaration label
5637 * should be located
5638 */
5639 int ind_scopedecl = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5640
5641 /*
5642 * spaces from the scope declaration label code should be located
5643 */
5644 int ind_scopedecl_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5645
5646 /*
5647 * amount K&R-style parameters should be indented
5648 */
5649 int ind_param = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5650
5651 /*
5652 * amount a function type spec should be indented
5653 */
5654 int ind_func_type = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5655
5656 /*
5657 * amount a cpp base class declaration or constructor initialization
5658 * should be indented
5659 */
5660 int ind_cpp_baseclass = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5661
5662 /*
5663 * additional spaces beyond the prevailing indent a continuation line
5664 * should be located
5665 */
5666 int ind_continuation = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5667
5668 /*
5669 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses
5670 */
5671 int ind_unclosed = curbuf->b_p_sw * 2;
5672
5673 /*
5674 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses, which
5675 * itself is also unclosed
5676 */
5677 int ind_unclosed2 = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5678
5679 /*
5680 * suppress ignoring spaces from the indent of a line starting with an
5681 * unclosed parentheses.
5682 */
5683 int ind_unclosed_noignore = 0;
5684
5685 /*
5686 * If the opening paren is the last nonwhite character on the line, and
5687 * ind_unclosed_wrapped is nonzero, use this indent relative to the outer
5688 * context (for very long lines).
5689 */
5690 int ind_unclosed_wrapped = 0;
5691
5692 /*
5693 * suppress ignoring white space when lining up with the character after
5694 * an unclosed parentheses.
5695 */
5696 int ind_unclosed_whiteok = 0;
5697
5698 /*
5699 * indent a closing parentheses under the line start of the matching
5700 * opening parentheses.
5701 */
5702 int ind_matching_paren = 0;
5703
5704 /*
5705 * Extra indent for comments.
5706 */
5707 int ind_comment = 0;
5708
5709 /*
5710 * spaces from the comment opener when there is nothing after it.
5711 */
5712 int ind_in_comment = 3;
5713
5714 /*
5715 * boolean: if non-zero, use ind_in_comment even if there is something
5716 * after the comment opener.
5717 */
5718 int ind_in_comment2 = 0;
5719
5720 /*
5721 * max lines to search for an open paren
5722 */
5723 int ind_maxparen = 20;
5724
5725 /*
5726 * max lines to search for an open comment
5727 */
5728 int ind_maxcomment = 70;
5729
5730 /*
5731 * handle braces for java code
5732 */
5733 int ind_java = 0;
5734
5735 /*
5736 * handle blocked cases correctly
5737 */
5738 int ind_keep_case_label = 0;
5739
5740 pos_T cur_curpos;
5741 int amount;
5742 int scope_amount;
5743 int cur_amount;
5744 colnr_T col;
5745 char_u *theline;
5746 char_u *linecopy;
5747 pos_T *trypos;
5748 pos_T *tryposBrace = NULL;
5749 pos_T our_paren_pos;
5750 char_u *start;
5751 int start_brace;
5752#define BRACE_IN_COL0 1 /* '{' is in comumn 0 */
5753#define BRACE_AT_START 2 /* '{' is at start of line */
5754#define BRACE_AT_END 3 /* '{' is at end of line */
5755 linenr_T ourscope;
5756 char_u *l;
5757 char_u *look;
5758 char_u terminated;
5759 int lookfor;
5760#define LOOKFOR_INITIAL 0
5761#define LOOKFOR_IF 1
5762#define LOOKFOR_DO 2
5763#define LOOKFOR_CASE 3
5764#define LOOKFOR_ANY 4
5765#define LOOKFOR_TERM 5
5766#define LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6
5767#define LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL 7
5768#define LOOKFOR_NOBREAK 8
5769#define LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS 9
5770#define LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT 10
5771
5772 int whilelevel;
5773 linenr_T lnum;
5774 char_u *options;
5775 int fraction = 0; /* init for GCC */
5776 int divider;
5777 int n;
5778 int iscase;
5779 int lookfor_break;
5780 int cont_amount = 0; /* amount for continuation line */
5781
5782 for (options = curbuf->b_p_cino; *options; )
5783 {
5784 l = options++;
5785 if (*options == '-')
5786 ++options;
5787 n = getdigits(&options);
5788 divider = 0;
5789 if (*options == '.') /* ".5s" means a fraction */
5790 {
5791 fraction = atol((char *)++options);
5792 while (VIM_ISDIGIT(*options))
5793 {
5794 ++options;
5795 if (divider)
5796 divider *= 10;
5797 else
5798 divider = 10;
5799 }
5800 }
5801 if (*options == 's') /* "2s" means two times 'shiftwidth' */
5802 {
5803 if (n == 0 && fraction == 0)
5804 n = curbuf->b_p_sw; /* just "s" is one 'shiftwidth' */
5805 else
5806 {
5807 n *= curbuf->b_p_sw;
5808 if (divider)
5809 n += (curbuf->b_p_sw * fraction + divider / 2) / divider;
5810 }
5811 ++options;
5812 }
5813 if (l[1] == '-')
5814 n = -n;
5815 /* When adding an entry here, also update the default 'cinoptions' in
5816 * change.txt, and add explanation for it! */
5817 switch (*l)
5818 {
5819 case '>': ind_level = n; break;
5820 case 'e': ind_open_imag = n; break;
5821 case 'n': ind_no_brace = n; break;
5822 case 'f': ind_first_open = n; break;
5823 case '{': ind_open_extra = n; break;
5824 case '}': ind_close_extra = n; break;
5825 case '^': ind_open_left_imag = n; break;
5826 case ':': ind_case = n; break;
5827 case '=': ind_case_code = n; break;
5828 case 'b': ind_case_break = n; break;
5829 case 'p': ind_param = n; break;
5830 case 't': ind_func_type = n; break;
5831 case '/': ind_comment = n; break;
5832 case 'c': ind_in_comment = n; break;
5833 case 'C': ind_in_comment2 = n; break;
5834 case 'i': ind_cpp_baseclass = n; break;
5835 case '+': ind_continuation = n; break;
5836 case '(': ind_unclosed = n; break;
5837 case 'u': ind_unclosed2 = n; break;
5838 case 'U': ind_unclosed_noignore = n; break;
5839 case 'W': ind_unclosed_wrapped = n; break;
5840 case 'w': ind_unclosed_whiteok = n; break;
5841 case 'm': ind_matching_paren = n; break;
5842 case ')': ind_maxparen = n; break;
5843 case '*': ind_maxcomment = n; break;
5844 case 'g': ind_scopedecl = n; break;
5845 case 'h': ind_scopedecl_code = n; break;
5846 case 'j': ind_java = n; break;
5847 case 'l': ind_keep_case_label = n; break;
5848 }
5849 }
5850
5851 /* remember where the cursor was when we started */
5852 cur_curpos = curwin->w_cursor;
5853
5854 /* Get a copy of the current contents of the line.
5855 * This is required, because only the most recent line obtained with
5856 * ml_get is valid! */
5857 linecopy = vim_strsave(ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum));
5858 if (linecopy == NULL)
5859 return 0;
5860
5861 /*
5862 * In insert mode and the cursor is on a ')' truncate the line at the
5863 * cursor position. We don't want to line up with the matching '(' when
5864 * inserting new stuff.
5865 * For unknown reasons the cursor might be past the end of the line, thus
5866 * check for that.
5867 */
5868 if ((State & INSERT)
5869 && curwin->w_cursor.col < STRLEN(linecopy)
5870 && linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] == ')')
5871 linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
5872
5873 theline = skipwhite(linecopy);
5874
5875 /* move the cursor to the start of the line */
5876
5877 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5878
5879 /*
5880 * #defines and so on always go at the left when included in 'cinkeys'.
5881 */
5882 if (*theline == '#' && (*linecopy == '#' || in_cinkeys('#', ' ', TRUE)))
5883 {
5884 amount = 0;
5885 }
5886
5887 /*
5888 * Is it a non-case label? Then that goes at the left margin too.
5889 */
5890 else if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) /* XXX */
5891 {
5892 amount = 0;
5893 }
5894
5895 /*
5896 * If we're inside a "//" comment and there is a "//" comment in a
5897 * previous line, lineup with that one.
5898 */
5899 else if (cin_islinecomment(theline)
5900 && (trypos = find_line_comment()) != NULL) /* XXX */
5901 {
5902 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
5903 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5904 amount = col;
5905 }
5906
5907 /*
5908 * If we're inside a comment and not looking at the start of the
5909 * comment, try using the 'comments' option.
5910 */
5911 else if (!cin_iscomment(theline)
5912 && (trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
5913 {
5914 int lead_start_len = 2;
5915 int lead_middle_len = 1;
5916 char_u lead_start[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* start-comment string */
5917 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */
5918 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */
5919 char_u *p;
5920 int start_align = 0;
5921 int start_off = 0;
5922 int done = FALSE;
5923
5924 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
5925 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5926 amount = col;
5927
5928 p = curbuf->b_p_com;
5929 while (*p != NUL)
5930 {
5931 int align = 0;
5932 int off = 0;
5933 int what = 0;
5934
5935 while (*p != NUL && *p != ':')
5936 {
5937 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_END || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
5938 what = *p++;
5939 else if (*p == COM_LEFT || *p == COM_RIGHT)
5940 align = *p++;
5941 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
5942 off = getdigits(&p);
5943 else
5944 ++p;
5945 }
5946
5947 if (*p == ':')
5948 ++p;
5949 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
5950 if (what == COM_START)
5951 {
5952 STRCPY(lead_start, lead_end);
5953 lead_start_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_start);
5954 start_off = off;
5955 start_align = align;
5956 }
5957 else if (what == COM_MIDDLE)
5958 {
5959 STRCPY(lead_middle, lead_end);
5960 lead_middle_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
5961 }
5962 else if (what == COM_END)
5963 {
5964 /* If our line starts with the middle comment string, line it
5965 * up with the comment opener per the 'comments' option. */
5966 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) == 0
5967 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) != 0)
5968 {
5969 done = TRUE;
5970 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
5971 {
5972 /* If the start comment string matches in the previous
5973 * line, use the indent of that line pluss offset. If
5974 * the middle comment string matches in the previous
5975 * line, use the indent of that line. XXX */
5976 look = skipwhite(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1));
5977 if (STRNCMP(look, lead_start, lead_start_len) == 0)
5978 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
5979 else if (STRNCMP(look, lead_middle,
5980 lead_middle_len) == 0)
5981 {
5982 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
5983 break;
5984 }
5985 /* If the start comment string doesn't match with the
5986 * start of the comment, skip this entry. XXX */
5987 else if (STRNCMP(ml_get(trypos->lnum) + trypos->col,
5988 lead_start, lead_start_len) != 0)
5989 continue;
5990 }
5991 if (start_off != 0)
5992 amount += start_off;
5993 else if (start_align == COM_RIGHT)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00005994 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
5995 - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005996 break;
5997 }
5998
5999 /* If our line starts with the end comment string, line it up
6000 * with the middle comment */
6001 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) != 0
6002 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) == 0)
6003 {
6004 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6005 /* XXX */
6006 if (off != 0)
6007 amount += off;
6008 else if (align == COM_RIGHT)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00006009 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6010 - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006011 done = TRUE;
6012 break;
6013 }
6014 }
6015 }
6016
6017 /* If our line starts with an asterisk, line up with the
6018 * asterisk in the comment opener; otherwise, line up
6019 * with the first character of the comment text.
6020 */
6021 if (done)
6022 ;
6023 else if (theline[0] == '*')
6024 amount += 1;
6025 else
6026 {
6027 /*
6028 * If we are more than one line away from the comment opener, take
6029 * the indent of the previous non-empty line. If 'cino' has "CO"
6030 * and we are just below the comment opener and there are any
6031 * white characters after it line up with the text after it;
6032 * otherwise, add the amount specified by "c" in 'cino'
6033 */
6034 amount = -1;
6035 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > trypos->lnum; --lnum)
6036 {
6037 if (linewhite(lnum)) /* skip blank lines */
6038 continue;
6039 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */
6040 break;
6041 }
6042 if (amount == -1) /* use the comment opener */
6043 {
6044 if (!ind_in_comment2)
6045 {
6046 start = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
6047 look = start + trypos->col + 2; /* skip / and * */
6048 if (*look != NUL) /* if something after it */
6049 trypos->col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(look) - start);
6050 }
6051 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6052 amount = col;
6053 if (ind_in_comment2 || *look == NUL)
6054 amount += ind_in_comment;
6055 }
6056 }
6057 }
6058
6059 /*
6060 * Are we inside parentheses or braces?
6061 */ /* XXX */
6062 else if (((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6063 && ind_java == 0)
6064 || (tryposBrace = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6065 || trypos != NULL)
6066 {
6067 if (trypos != NULL && tryposBrace != NULL)
6068 {
6069 /* Both an unmatched '(' and '{' is found. Use the one which is
6070 * closer to the current cursor position, set the other to NULL. */
6071 if (trypos->lnum != tryposBrace->lnum
6072 ? trypos->lnum < tryposBrace->lnum
6073 : trypos->col < tryposBrace->col)
6074 trypos = NULL;
6075 else
6076 tryposBrace = NULL;
6077 }
6078
6079 if (trypos != NULL)
6080 {
6081 /*
6082 * If the matching paren is more than one line away, use the indent of
6083 * a previous non-empty line that matches the same paren.
6084 */
6085 amount = -1;
6086 cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6087 our_paren_pos = *trypos;
6088 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > our_paren_pos.lnum; --lnum)
6089 {
6090 l = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum));
6091 if (cin_nocode(l)) /* skip comment lines */
6092 continue;
6093 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &lnum)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
6094 continue;
6095 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
6096
6097 /* Skip a comment. XXX */
6098 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6099 {
6100 lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6101 continue;
6102 }
6103
6104 /* XXX */
6105 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(
6106 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6107 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6108 && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum
6109 && trypos->col == our_paren_pos.col)
6110 {
6111 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */
6112
6113 if (theline[0] == ')')
6114 {
6115 if (our_paren_pos.lnum != lnum && cur_amount > amount)
6116 cur_amount = amount;
6117 amount = -1;
6118 }
6119 break;
6120 }
6121 }
6122
6123 /*
6124 * Line up with line where the matching paren is. XXX
6125 * If the line starts with a '(' or the indent for unclosed
6126 * parentheses is zero, line up with the unclosed parentheses.
6127 */
6128 if (amount == -1)
6129 {
6130 amount = skip_label(our_paren_pos.lnum, &look, ind_maxcomment);
6131 if (theline[0] == ')' || ind_unclosed == 0
6132 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
6133 {
6134 /*
6135 * If we're looking at a close paren, line up right there;
6136 * otherwise, line up with the next (non-white) character.
6137 * When ind_unclosed_wrapped is set and the matching paren is
6138 * the last nonwhite character of the line, use either the
6139 * indent of the current line or the indentation of the next
6140 * outer paren and add ind_unclosed_wrapped (for very long
6141 * lines).
6142 */
6143 if (theline[0] != ')')
6144 {
6145 cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6146 l = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum);
6147 if (ind_unclosed_wrapped
6148 && cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"(", NULL))
6149 {
6150 /* look for opening unmatched paren, indent one level
6151 * for each additional level */
6152 n = 1;
6153 for (col = 0; col < our_paren_pos.col; ++col)
6154 {
6155 switch (l[col])
6156 {
6157 case '(':
6158 case '{': ++n;
6159 break;
6160
6161 case ')':
6162 case '}': if (n > 1)
6163 --n;
6164 break;
6165 }
6166 }
6167
6168 our_paren_pos.col = 0;
6169 amount += n * ind_unclosed_wrapped;
6170 }
6171 else if (ind_unclosed_whiteok)
6172 our_paren_pos.col++;
6173 else
6174 {
6175 col = our_paren_pos.col + 1;
6176 while (vim_iswhite(l[col]))
6177 col++;
6178 if (l[col] != NUL) /* In case of trailing space */
6179 our_paren_pos.col = col;
6180 else
6181 our_paren_pos.col++;
6182 }
6183 }
6184
6185 /*
6186 * Find how indented the paren is, or the character after it
6187 * if we did the above "if".
6188 */
6189 if (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6190 {
6191 getvcol(curwin, &our_paren_pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6192 if (cur_amount > (int)col)
6193 cur_amount = col;
6194 }
6195 }
6196
6197 if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_matching_paren)
6198 {
6199 /* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */
6200 }
6201 else if (ind_unclosed == 0 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore
6202 && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
6203 {
6204 if (cur_amount != MAXCOL)
6205 amount = cur_amount;
6206 }
6207 else
6208 {
6209 /* add ind_unclosed2 for each '(' before our matching one */
6210 col = our_paren_pos.col;
6211 while (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6212 {
6213 --our_paren_pos.col;
6214 switch (*ml_get_pos(&our_paren_pos))
6215 {
6216 case '(': amount += ind_unclosed2;
6217 col = our_paren_pos.col;
6218 break;
6219 case ')': amount -= ind_unclosed2;
6220 col = MAXCOL;
6221 break;
6222 }
6223 }
6224
6225 /* Use ind_unclosed once, when the first '(' is not inside
6226 * braces */
6227 if (col == MAXCOL)
6228 amount += ind_unclosed;
6229 else
6230 {
6231 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum;
6232 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6233 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6234 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6235 amount += ind_unclosed2;
6236 else
6237 amount += ind_unclosed;
6238 }
6239 /*
6240 * For a line starting with ')' use the minimum of the two
6241 * positions, to avoid giving it more indent than the previous
6242 * lines:
6243 * func_long_name( if (x
6244 * arg && yy
6245 * ) ^ not here ) ^ not here
6246 */
6247 if (cur_amount < amount)
6248 amount = cur_amount;
6249 }
6250 }
6251
6252 /* add extra indent for a comment */
6253 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
6254 amount += ind_comment;
6255 }
6256
6257 /*
6258 * Are we at least inside braces, then?
6259 */
6260 else
6261 {
6262 trypos = tryposBrace;
6263
6264 ourscope = trypos->lnum;
6265 start = ml_get(ourscope);
6266
6267 /*
6268 * Now figure out how indented the line is in general.
6269 * If the brace was at the start of the line, we use that;
6270 * otherwise, check out the indentation of the line as
6271 * a whole and then add the "imaginary indent" to that.
6272 */
6273 look = skipwhite(start);
6274 if (*look == '{')
6275 {
6276 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6277 amount = col;
6278 if (*start == '{')
6279 start_brace = BRACE_IN_COL0;
6280 else
6281 start_brace = BRACE_AT_START;
6282 }
6283 else
6284 {
6285 /*
6286 * that opening brace might have been on a continuation
6287 * line. if so, find the start of the line.
6288 */
6289 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = ourscope;
6290
6291 /*
6292 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6293 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6294 */
6295 lnum = ourscope;
6296 if (find_last_paren(start, '(', ')')
6297 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6298 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6299 lnum = trypos->lnum;
6300
6301 /*
6302 * It could have been something like
6303 * case 1: if (asdf &&
6304 * ldfd) {
6305 * }
6306 */
6307 if (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
6308 amount = get_indent();
6309 else
6310 amount = skip_label(lnum, &l, ind_maxcomment);
6311
6312 start_brace = BRACE_AT_END;
6313 }
6314
6315 /*
6316 * if we're looking at a closing brace, that's where
6317 * we want to be. otherwise, add the amount of room
6318 * that an indent is supposed to be.
6319 */
6320 if (theline[0] == '}')
6321 {
6322 /*
6323 * they may want closing braces to line up with something
6324 * other than the open brace. indulge them, if so.
6325 */
6326 amount += ind_close_extra;
6327 }
6328 else
6329 {
6330 /*
6331 * If we're looking at an "else", try to find an "if"
6332 * to match it with.
6333 * If we're looking at a "while", try to find a "do"
6334 * to match it with.
6335 */
6336 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6337 if (cin_iselse(theline))
6338 lookfor = LOOKFOR_IF;
6339 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(theline, cur_curpos.lnum, ind_maxparen))
6340 /* XXX */
6341 lookfor = LOOKFOR_DO;
6342 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_INITIAL)
6343 {
6344 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = cur_curpos.lnum;
6345 if (find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen,
6346 ind_maxcomment) == OK)
6347 {
6348 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
6349 goto theend;
6350 }
6351 }
6352
6353 /*
6354 * We get here if we are not on an "while-of-do" or "else" (or
6355 * failed to find a matching "if").
6356 * Search backwards for something to line up with.
6357 * First set amount for when we don't find anything.
6358 */
6359
6360 /*
6361 * if the '{' is _really_ at the left margin, use the imaginary
6362 * location of a left-margin brace. Otherwise, correct the
6363 * location for ind_open_extra.
6364 */
6365
6366 if (start_brace == BRACE_IN_COL0) /* '{' is in column 0 */
6367 {
6368 amount = ind_open_left_imag;
6369 }
6370 else
6371 {
6372 if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_END) /* '{' is at end of line */
6373 amount += ind_open_imag;
6374 else
6375 {
6376 /* Compensate for adding ind_open_extra later. */
6377 amount -= ind_open_extra;
6378 if (amount < 0)
6379 amount = 0;
6380 }
6381 }
6382
6383 lookfor_break = FALSE;
6384
6385 if (cin_iscase(theline)) /* it's a switch() label */
6386 {
6387 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CASE; /* find a previous switch() label */
6388 amount += ind_case;
6389 }
6390 else if (cin_isscopedecl(theline)) /* private:, ... */
6391 {
6392 lookfor = LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL; /* class decl is this block */
6393 amount += ind_scopedecl;
6394 }
6395 else
6396 {
6397 if (ind_case_break && cin_isbreak(theline)) /* break; ... */
6398 lookfor_break = TRUE;
6399
6400 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6401 amount += ind_level; /* ind_level from start of block */
6402 }
6403 scope_amount = amount;
6404 whilelevel = 0;
6405
6406 /*
6407 * Search backwards. If we find something we recognize, line up
6408 * with that.
6409 *
6410 * if we're looking at an open brace, indent
6411 * the usual amount relative to the conditional
6412 * that opens the block.
6413 */
6414 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
6415 for (;;)
6416 {
6417 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
6418 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6419
6420 /*
6421 * If we went all the way back to the start of our scope, line
6422 * up with it.
6423 */
6424 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum <= ourscope)
6425 {
6426 /* we reached end of scope:
6427 * if looking for a enum or structure initialization
6428 * go further back:
6429 * if it is an initializer (enum xxx or xxx =), then
6430 * don't add ind_continuation, otherwise it is a variable
6431 * declaration:
6432 * int x,
6433 * here; <-- add ind_continuation
6434 */
6435 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6436 {
6437 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0
6438 || curwin->w_cursor.lnum
6439 < ourscope - ind_maxparen)
6440 {
6441 /* nothing found (abuse ind_maxparen as limit)
6442 * assume terminated line (i.e. a variable
6443 * initialization) */
6444 if (cont_amount > 0)
6445 amount = cont_amount;
6446 else
6447 amount += ind_continuation;
6448 break;
6449 }
6450
6451 l = ml_get_curline();
6452
6453 /*
6454 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the
6455 * comment.
6456 */
6457 trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment);
6458 if (trypos != NULL)
6459 {
6460 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6461 continue;
6462 }
6463
6464 /*
6465 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
6466 */
6467 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6468 continue;
6469
6470 if (cin_nocode(l))
6471 continue;
6472
6473 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6474
6475 /*
6476 * If we are at top level and the line looks like a
6477 * function declaration, we are done
6478 * (it's a variable declaration).
6479 */
6480 if (start_brace != BRACE_IN_COL0
6481 || !cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6482 {
6483 /* if the line is terminated with another ','
6484 * it is a continued variable initialization.
6485 * don't add extra indent.
6486 * TODO: does not work, if a function
6487 * declaration is split over multiple lines:
6488 * cin_isfuncdecl returns FALSE then.
6489 */
6490 if (terminated == ',')
6491 break;
6492
6493 /* if it es a enum declaration or an assignment,
6494 * we are done.
6495 */
6496 if (terminated != ';' && cin_isinit())
6497 break;
6498
6499 /* nothing useful found */
6500 if (terminated == 0 || terminated == '{')
6501 continue;
6502 }
6503
6504 if (terminated != ';')
6505 {
6506 /* Skip parens and braces. Position the cursor
6507 * over the rightmost paren, so that matching it
6508 * will take us back to the start of the line.
6509 */ /* XXX */
6510 trypos = NULL;
6511 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'))
6512 trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6513 ind_maxcomment);
6514
6515 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6516 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6517
6518 if (trypos != NULL)
6519 {
6520 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6521 continue;
6522 }
6523 }
6524
6525 /* it's a variable declaration, add indentation
6526 * like in
6527 * int a,
6528 * b;
6529 */
6530 if (cont_amount > 0)
6531 amount = cont_amount;
6532 else
6533 amount += ind_continuation;
6534 }
6535 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6536 {
6537 if (cont_amount > 0)
6538 amount = cont_amount;
6539 else
6540 amount += ind_continuation;
6541 }
6542 else if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6543 && lookfor != LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6544 {
6545 amount = scope_amount;
6546 if (theline[0] == '{')
6547 amount += ind_open_extra;
6548 }
6549 break;
6550 }
6551
6552 /*
6553 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
6554 */ /* XXX */
6555 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6556 {
6557 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6558 continue;
6559 }
6560
6561 l = ml_get_curline();
6562
6563 /*
6564 * If this is a switch() label, may line up relative to that.
6565 * if this is a C++ scope declaration, do the same.
6566 */
6567 iscase = cin_iscase(l);
6568 if (iscase || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6569 {
6570 /* we are only looking for cpp base class
6571 * declaration/initialization any longer */
6572 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6573 break;
6574
6575 /* When looking for a "do" we are not interested in
6576 * labels. */
6577 if (whilelevel > 0)
6578 continue;
6579
6580 /*
6581 * case xx:
6582 * c = 99 + <- this indent plus continuation
6583 *-> here;
6584 */
6585 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6586 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6587 {
6588 if (cont_amount > 0)
6589 amount = cont_amount;
6590 else
6591 amount += ind_continuation;
6592 break;
6593 }
6594
6595 /*
6596 * case xx: <- line up with this case
6597 * x = 333;
6598 * case yy:
6599 */
6600 if ( (iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE)
6601 || (iscase && lookfor_break)
6602 || (!iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL))
6603 {
6604 /*
6605 * Check that this case label is not for another
6606 * switch()
6607 */ /* XXX */
6608 if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) ==
6609 NULL || trypos->lnum == ourscope)
6610 {
6611 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
6612 break;
6613 }
6614 continue;
6615 }
6616
6617 n = get_indent_nolabel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum); /* XXX */
6618
6619 /*
6620 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if
6621 * y = y + 1;
6622 * -> s = 99;
6623 *
6624 * case xx:
6625 * if (cond) <- line up with this line
6626 * y = y + 1;
6627 * -> s = 99;
6628 */
6629 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
6630 {
6631 if (n)
6632 amount = n;
6633
6634 if (!lookfor_break)
6635 break;
6636 }
6637
6638 /*
6639 * case xx: x = x + 1; <- line up with this x
6640 * -> y = y + 1;
6641 *
6642 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if
6643 * -> y = y + 1;
6644 */
6645 if (n)
6646 {
6647 amount = n;
6648 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6649 if (l != NULL && cin_is_cinword(l))
6650 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6651 break;
6652 }
6653
6654 /*
6655 * Try to get the indent of a statement before the switch
6656 * label. If nothing is found, line up relative to the
6657 * switch label.
6658 * break; <- may line up with this line
6659 * case xx:
6660 * -> y = 1;
6661 */
6662 scope_amount = get_indent() + (iscase /* XXX */
6663 ? ind_case_code : ind_scopedecl_code);
6664 lookfor = ind_case_break ? LOOKFOR_NOBREAK : LOOKFOR_ANY;
6665 continue;
6666 }
6667
6668 /*
6669 * Looking for a switch() label or C++ scope declaration,
6670 * ignore other lines, skip {}-blocks.
6671 */
6672 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE || lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL)
6673 {
6674 if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}') && (trypos =
6675 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6676 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6677 continue;
6678 }
6679
6680 /*
6681 * Ignore jump labels with nothing after them.
6682 */
6683 if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
6684 {
6685 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6686 if (l == NULL || cin_nocode(l))
6687 continue;
6688 }
6689
6690 /*
6691 * Ignore #defines, #if, etc.
6692 * Ignore comment and empty lines.
6693 * (need to get the line again, cin_islabel() may have
6694 * unlocked it)
6695 */
6696 l = ml_get_curline();
6697 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
6698 || cin_nocode(l))
6699 continue;
6700
6701 /*
6702 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or
6703 * constructor initialization?
6704 */ /* XXX */
6705 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM && ind_cpp_baseclass
6706 && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
6707 {
6708 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6709 {
6710 if (cont_amount > 0)
6711 amount = cont_amount;
6712 else
6713 amount += ind_continuation;
6714 }
6715 else if (col == 0 || theline[0] == '{')
6716 {
6717 amount = get_indent();
6718 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
6719 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6720 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6721 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum); /* XXX */
6722 if (theline[0] != '{')
6723 amount += ind_cpp_baseclass;
6724 }
6725 else
6726 {
6727 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6728 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
6729 amount = (int)col;
6730 }
6731 break;
6732 }
6733 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6734 {
6735 /* only look, whether there is a cpp base class
6736 * declaration or initialization before the opening brace. */
6737 if (cin_isterminated(l, TRUE, FALSE))
6738 break;
6739 else
6740 continue;
6741 }
6742
6743 /*
6744 * What happens next depends on the line being terminated.
6745 * If terminated with a ',' only consider it terminating if
6746 * there is anoter unterminated statement behind, eg:
6747 * 123,
6748 * sizeof
6749 * here
6750 * Otherwise check whether it is a enumeration or structure
6751 * initialisation (not indented) or a variable declaration
6752 * (indented).
6753 */
6754 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6755
6756 if (terminated == 0 || (lookfor != LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6757 && terminated == ','))
6758 {
6759 /*
6760 * if we're in the middle of a paren thing,
6761 * go back to the line that starts it so
6762 * we can get the right prevailing indent
6763 * if ( foo &&
6764 * bar )
6765 */
6766 /*
6767 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6768 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6769 */
6770 (void)find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
6771 trypos = find_match_paren(
6772 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6773 ind_maxcomment);
6774
6775 /*
6776 * If we are looking for ',', we also look for matching
6777 * braces.
6778 */
6779 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6780 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6781
6782 if (trypos != NULL)
6783 {
6784 /*
6785 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is
6786 * handled above.
6787 * case xx: if ( asdf &&
6788 * asdf)
6789 */
6790 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
6791 l = ml_get_curline();
6792 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6793 {
6794 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6795 continue;
6796 }
6797 }
6798
6799 /*
6800 * Skip over continuation lines to find the one to get the
6801 * indent from
6802 * char *usethis = "bla\
6803 * bla",
6804 * here;
6805 */
6806 if (terminated == ',')
6807 {
6808 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6809 {
6810 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6811 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
6812 break;
6813 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6814 }
6815 }
6816
6817 /*
6818 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
6819 * ignoring any jump label. XXX
6820 */
6821 cur_amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
6822 &l, ind_maxcomment);
6823
6824 /*
6825 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, and it
6826 * starts with a '{', line it up with this line.
6827 * while (not)
6828 * -> {
6829 * }
6830 */
6831 if (terminated != ',' && lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6832 && theline[0] == '{')
6833 {
6834 amount = cur_amount;
6835 /*
6836 * Only add ind_open_extra when the current line
6837 * doesn't start with a '{', which must have a match
6838 * in the same line (scope is the same). Probably:
6839 * { 1, 2 },
6840 * -> { 3, 4 }
6841 */
6842 if (*skipwhite(l) != '{')
6843 amount += ind_open_extra;
6844
6845 if (ind_cpp_baseclass)
6846 {
6847 /* have to look back, whether it is a cpp base
6848 * class declaration or initialization */
6849 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
6850 continue;
6851 }
6852 break;
6853 }
6854
6855 /*
6856 * Check if we are after an "if", "while", etc.
6857 * Also allow " } else".
6858 */
6859 if (cin_is_cinword(l) || cin_iselse(skipwhite(l)))
6860 {
6861 /*
6862 * Found an unterminated line after an if (), line up
6863 * with the last one.
6864 * if (cond)
6865 * 100 +
6866 * -> here;
6867 */
6868 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6869 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6870 {
6871 if (cont_amount > 0)
6872 amount = cont_amount;
6873 else
6874 amount += ind_continuation;
6875 break;
6876 }
6877
6878 /*
6879 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, we
6880 * are finished.
6881 * while (not)
6882 * -> here;
6883 * Otherwise this indent can be used when the line
6884 * before this is terminated.
6885 * yyy;
6886 * if (stat)
6887 * while (not)
6888 * xxx;
6889 * -> here;
6890 */
6891 amount = cur_amount;
6892 if (theline[0] == '{')
6893 amount += ind_open_extra;
6894 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
6895 {
6896 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6897 break;
6898 }
6899
6900 /*
6901 * Special trick: when expecting the while () after a
6902 * do, line up with the while()
6903 * do
6904 * x = 1;
6905 * -> here
6906 */
6907 l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline());
6908 if (cin_isdo(l))
6909 {
6910 if (whilelevel == 0)
6911 break;
6912 --whilelevel;
6913 }
6914
6915 /*
6916 * When searching for a terminated line, don't use the
6917 * one between the "if" and the "else".
6918 * Need to use the scope of this "else". XXX
6919 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {".
6920 */
6921 if (cin_iselse(l)
6922 && whilelevel == 0
6923 && ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
6924 == NULL
6925 || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum,
6926 ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL))
6927 break;
6928 }
6929
6930 /*
6931 * If we're below an unterminated line that is not an
6932 * "if" or something, we may line up with this line or
6933 * add someting for a continuation line, depending on
6934 * the line before this one.
6935 */
6936 else
6937 {
6938 /*
6939 * Found two unterminated lines on a row, line up with
6940 * the last one.
6941 * c = 99 +
6942 * 100 +
6943 * -> here;
6944 */
6945 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6946 {
6947 /* When line ends in a comma add extra indent */
6948 if (terminated == ',')
6949 amount += ind_continuation;
6950 break;
6951 }
6952
6953 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6954 {
6955 /* Found two lines ending in ',', lineup with the
6956 * lowest one, but check for cpp base class
6957 * declaration/initialization, if it is an
6958 * opening brace or we are looking just for
6959 * enumerations/initializations. */
6960 if (terminated == ',')
6961 {
6962 if (ind_cpp_baseclass == 0)
6963 break;
6964
6965 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
6966 continue;
6967 }
6968
6969 /* Ignore unterminated lines in between, but
6970 * reduce indent. */
6971 if (amount > cur_amount)
6972 amount = cur_amount;
6973 }
6974 else
6975 {
6976 /*
6977 * Found first unterminated line on a row, may
6978 * line up with this line, remember its indent
6979 * 100 +
6980 * -> here;
6981 */
6982 amount = cur_amount;
6983
6984 /*
6985 * If previous line ends in ',', check whether we
6986 * are in an initialization or enum
6987 * struct xxx =
6988 * {
6989 * sizeof a,
6990 * 124 };
6991 * or a normal possible continuation line.
6992 * but only, of no other statement has been found
6993 * yet.
6994 */
6995 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL && terminated == ',')
6996 {
6997 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT;
6998 cont_amount = cin_first_id_amount();
6999 }
7000 else
7001 {
7002 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL
7003 && *l != NUL
7004 && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7005 /* XXX */
7006 cont_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(
7007 curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7008 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
7009 lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM;
7010 }
7011 }
7012 }
7013 }
7014
7015 /*
7016 * Check if we are after a while (cond);
7017 * If so: Ignore until the matching "do".
7018 */
7019 /* XXX */
7020 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(l,
7021 curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7022 {
7023 /*
7024 * Found an unterminated line after a while ();, line up
7025 * with the last one.
7026 * while (cond);
7027 * 100 + <- line up with this one
7028 * -> here;
7029 */
7030 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7031 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7032 {
7033 if (cont_amount > 0)
7034 amount = cont_amount;
7035 else
7036 amount += ind_continuation;
7037 break;
7038 }
7039
7040 if (whilelevel == 0)
7041 {
7042 lookfor = LOOKFOR_TERM;
7043 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7044 if (theline[0] == '{')
7045 amount += ind_open_extra;
7046 }
7047 ++whilelevel;
7048 }
7049
7050 /*
7051 * We are after a "normal" statement.
7052 * If we had another statement we can stop now and use the
7053 * indent of that other statement.
7054 * Otherwise the indent of the current statement may be used,
7055 * search backwards for the next "normal" statement.
7056 */
7057 else
7058 {
7059 /*
7060 * Skip single break line, if before a switch label. It
7061 * may be lined up with the case label.
7062 */
7063 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_NOBREAK
7064 && cin_isbreak(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
7065 {
7066 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ANY;
7067 continue;
7068 }
7069
7070 /*
7071 * Handle "do {" line.
7072 */
7073 if (whilelevel > 0)
7074 {
7075 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7076 if (cin_isdo(l))
7077 {
7078 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7079 --whilelevel;
7080 continue;
7081 }
7082 }
7083
7084 /*
7085 * Found a terminated line above an unterminated line. Add
7086 * the amount for a continuation line.
7087 * x = 1;
7088 * y = foo +
7089 * -> here;
7090 * or
7091 * int x = 1;
7092 * int foo,
7093 * -> here;
7094 */
7095 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7096 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7097 {
7098 if (cont_amount > 0)
7099 amount = cont_amount;
7100 else
7101 amount += ind_continuation;
7102 break;
7103 }
7104
7105 /*
7106 * Found a terminated line above a terminated line or "if"
7107 * etc. line. Use the amount of the line below us.
7108 * x = 1; x = 1;
7109 * if (asdf) y = 2;
7110 * while (asdf) ->here;
7111 * here;
7112 * ->foo;
7113 */
7114 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
7115 {
7116 if (!lookfor_break && whilelevel == 0)
7117 break;
7118 }
7119
7120 /*
7121 * First line above the one we're indenting is terminated.
7122 * To know what needs to be done look further backward for
7123 * a terminated line.
7124 */
7125 else
7126 {
7127 /*
7128 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so
7129 * that matching it will take us back to the start of
7130 * the line. Helps for:
7131 * func(asdr,
7132 * asdfasdf);
7133 * here;
7134 */
7135term_again:
7136 l = ml_get_curline();
7137 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7138 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7139 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7140 {
7141 /*
7142 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is
7143 * handled above.
7144 * case xx: if ( asdf &&
7145 * asdf)
7146 */
7147 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7148 l = ml_get_curline();
7149 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
7150 {
7151 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7152 continue;
7153 }
7154 }
7155
7156 /* When aligning with the case statement, don't align
7157 * with a statement after it.
7158 * case 1: { <-- don't use this { position
7159 * stat;
7160 * }
7161 * case 2:
7162 * stat;
7163 * }
7164 */
7165 iscase = (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(l));
7166
7167 /*
7168 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
7169 * ignoring any jump label.
7170 */
7171 amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
7172 &l, ind_maxcomment);
7173
7174 if (theline[0] == '{')
7175 amount += ind_open_extra;
7176 /* See remark above: "Only add ind_open_extra.." */
7177 if (*skipwhite(l) == '{')
7178 amount -= ind_open_extra;
7179 lookfor = iscase ? LOOKFOR_ANY : LOOKFOR_TERM;
7180
7181 /*
7182 * If we're at the end of a block, skip to the start of
7183 * that block.
7184 */
7185 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7186 if (*cin_skipcomment(l) == '}'
7187 && (trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7188 != NULL) /* XXX */
7189 {
7190 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7191 /* if not "else {" check for terminated again */
7192 /* but skip block for "} else {" */
7193 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7194 if (*l == '}' || !cin_iselse(l))
7195 goto term_again;
7196 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7197 }
7198 }
7199 }
7200 }
7201 }
7202 }
7203
7204 /* add extra indent for a comment */
7205 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7206 amount += ind_comment;
7207 }
7208
7209 /*
7210 * ok -- we're not inside any sort of structure at all!
7211 *
7212 * this means we're at the top level, and everything should
7213 * basically just match where the previous line is, except
7214 * for the lines immediately following a function declaration,
7215 * which are K&R-style parameters and need to be indented.
7216 */
7217 else
7218 {
7219 /*
7220 * if our line starts with an open brace, forget about any
7221 * prevailing indent and make sure it looks like the start
7222 * of a function
7223 */
7224
7225 if (theline[0] == '{')
7226 {
7227 amount = ind_first_open;
7228 }
7229
7230 /*
7231 * If the NEXT line is a function declaration, the current
7232 * line needs to be indented as a function type spec.
7233 * Don't do this if the current line looks like a comment
7234 * or if the current line is terminated, ie. ends in ';'.
7235 */
7236 else if (cur_curpos.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count
7237 && !cin_nocode(theline)
7238 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)":", NULL)
7239 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7240 && cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum + 1)
7241 && !cin_isterminated(theline, FALSE, TRUE))
7242 {
7243 amount = ind_func_type;
7244 }
7245 else
7246 {
7247 amount = 0;
7248 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7249
7250 /* search backwards until we find something we recognize */
7251
7252 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7253 {
7254 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7255 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7256
7257 l = ml_get_curline();
7258
7259 /*
7260 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
7261 */ /* XXX */
7262 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7263 {
7264 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
7265 continue;
7266 }
7267
7268 /*
7269 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or constructor
7270 * initialization?
7271 */ /* XXX */
7272 if (ind_cpp_baseclass != 0 && theline[0] != '{'
7273 && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
7274 {
7275 if (col == 0)
7276 {
7277 amount = get_indent() + ind_cpp_baseclass; /* XXX */
7278 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7279 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7280 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7281 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum)
7282 + ind_cpp_baseclass; /* XXX */
7283 }
7284 else
7285 {
7286 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
7287 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
7288 amount = (int)col;
7289 }
7290 break;
7291 }
7292
7293 /*
7294 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
7295 */
7296 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7297 continue;
7298
7299 if (cin_nocode(l))
7300 continue;
7301
7302 /*
7303 * If the previous line ends in ',', use one level of
7304 * indentation:
7305 * int foo,
7306 * bar;
7307 * do this before checking for '}' in case of eg.
7308 * enum foobar
7309 * {
7310 * ...
7311 * } foo,
7312 * bar;
7313 */
7314 n = 0;
7315 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7316 || (*l != NUL && (n = l[STRLEN(l) - 1]) == '\\'))
7317 {
7318 /* take us back to opening paren */
7319 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7320 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7321 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7322 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7323
7324 /* For a line ending in ',' that is a continuation line go
7325 * back to the first line with a backslash:
7326 * char *foo = "bla\
7327 * bla",
7328 * here;
7329 */
7330 while (n == 0 && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7331 {
7332 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7333 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
7334 break;
7335 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7336 }
7337
7338 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7339
7340 if (amount == 0)
7341 amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7342 if (amount == 0)
7343 amount = ind_continuation;
7344 break;
7345 }
7346
7347 /*
7348 * If the line looks like a function declaration, and we're
7349 * not in a comment, put it the left margin.
7350 */
7351 if (cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum)) /* XXX */
7352 break;
7353 l = ml_get_curline();
7354
7355 /*
7356 * Finding the closing '}' of a previous function. Put
7357 * current line at the left margin. For when 'cino' has "fs".
7358 */
7359 if (*skipwhite(l) == '}')
7360 break;
7361
7362 /* (matching {)
7363 * If the previous line ends on '};' (maybe followed by
7364 * comments) align at column 0. For example:
7365 * char *string_array[] = { "foo",
7366 * / * x * / "b};ar" }; / * foobar * /
7367 */
7368 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"};", NULL))
7369 break;
7370
7371 /*
7372 * If the PREVIOUS line is a function declaration, the current
7373 * line (and the ones that follow) needs to be indented as
7374 * parameters.
7375 */
7376 if (cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7377 {
7378 amount = ind_param;
7379 break;
7380 }
7381
7382 /*
7383 * If the previous line ends in ';' and the line before the
7384 * previous line ends in ',' or '\', ident to column zero:
7385 * int foo,
7386 * bar;
7387 * indent_to_0 here;
7388 */
7389 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u*)";", NULL))
7390 {
7391 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7392 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7393 || (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\'))
7394 break;
7395 l = ml_get_curline();
7396 }
7397
7398 /*
7399 * Doesn't look like anything interesting -- so just
7400 * use the indent of this line.
7401 *
7402 * Position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
7403 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
7404 */
7405 find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
7406
7407 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7408 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7409 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7410 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7411 break;
7412 }
7413
7414 /* add extra indent for a comment */
7415 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7416 amount += ind_comment;
7417
7418 /* add extra indent if the previous line ended in a backslash:
7419 * "asdfasdf\
7420 * here";
7421 * char *foo = "asdf\
7422 * here";
7423 */
7424 if (cur_curpos.lnum > 1)
7425 {
7426 l = ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7427 if (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7428 {
7429 cur_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7430 if (cur_amount > 0)
7431 amount = cur_amount;
7432 else if (cur_amount == 0)
7433 amount += ind_continuation;
7434 }
7435 }
7436 }
7437 }
7438
7439theend:
7440 /* put the cursor back where it belongs */
7441 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7442
7443 vim_free(linecopy);
7444
7445 if (amount < 0)
7446 return 0;
7447 return amount;
7448}
7449
7450 static int
7451find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
7452 int lookfor;
7453 linenr_T ourscope;
7454 int ind_maxparen;
7455 int ind_maxcomment;
7456{
7457 char_u *look;
7458 pos_T *theirscope;
7459 char_u *mightbeif;
7460 int elselevel;
7461 int whilelevel;
7462
7463 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7464 {
7465 elselevel = 1;
7466 whilelevel = 0;
7467 }
7468 else
7469 {
7470 elselevel = 0;
7471 whilelevel = 1;
7472 }
7473
7474 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7475
7476 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > ourscope + 1)
7477 {
7478 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7479 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7480
7481 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7482 if (cin_iselse(look)
7483 || cin_isif(look)
7484 || cin_isdo(look) /* XXX */
7485 || cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7486 {
7487 /*
7488 * if we've gone outside the braces entirely,
7489 * we must be out of scope...
7490 */
7491 theirscope = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); /* XXX */
7492 if (theirscope == NULL)
7493 break;
7494
7495 /*
7496 * and if the brace enclosing this is further
7497 * back than the one enclosing the else, we're
7498 * out of luck too.
7499 */
7500 if (theirscope->lnum < ourscope)
7501 break;
7502
7503 /*
7504 * and if they're enclosed in a *deeper* brace,
7505 * then we can ignore it because it's in a
7506 * different scope...
7507 */
7508 if (theirscope->lnum > ourscope)
7509 continue;
7510
7511 /*
7512 * if it was an "else" (that's not an "else if")
7513 * then we need to go back to another if, so
7514 * increment elselevel
7515 */
7516 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7517 if (cin_iselse(look))
7518 {
7519 mightbeif = cin_skipcomment(look + 4);
7520 if (!cin_isif(mightbeif))
7521 ++elselevel;
7522 continue;
7523 }
7524
7525 /*
7526 * if it was a "while" then we need to go back to
7527 * another "do", so increment whilelevel. XXX
7528 */
7529 if (cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7530 {
7531 ++whilelevel;
7532 continue;
7533 }
7534
7535 /* If it's an "if" decrement elselevel */
7536 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7537 if (cin_isif(look))
7538 {
7539 elselevel--;
7540 /*
7541 * When looking for an "if" ignore "while"s that
7542 * get in the way.
7543 */
7544 if (elselevel == 0 && lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7545 whilelevel = 0;
7546 }
7547
7548 /* If it's a "do" decrement whilelevel */
7549 if (cin_isdo(look))
7550 whilelevel--;
7551
7552 /*
7553 * if we've used up all the elses, then
7554 * this must be the if that we want!
7555 * match the indent level of that if.
7556 */
7557 if (elselevel <= 0 && whilelevel <= 0)
7558 {
7559 return OK;
7560 }
7561 }
7562 }
7563 return FAIL;
7564}
7565
7566# if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
7567/*
7568 * Get indent level from 'indentexpr'.
7569 */
7570 int
7571get_expr_indent()
7572{
7573 int indent;
7574 pos_T pos;
7575 int save_State;
7576
7577 pos = curwin->w_cursor;
7578 set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7579 ++sandbox;
7580 indent = eval_to_number(curbuf->b_p_inde);
7581 --sandbox;
7582
7583 /* Restore the cursor position so that 'indentexpr' doesn't need to.
7584 * Pretend to be in Insert mode, allow cursor past end of line for "o"
7585 * command. */
7586 save_State = State;
7587 State = INSERT;
7588 curwin->w_cursor = pos;
7589 check_cursor();
7590 State = save_State;
7591
7592 /* If there is an error, just keep the current indent. */
7593 if (indent < 0)
7594 indent = get_indent();
7595
7596 return indent;
7597}
7598# endif
7599
7600#endif /* FEAT_CINDENT */
7601
7602#if defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(PROTO)
7603
7604static int lisp_match __ARGS((char_u *p));
7605
7606 static int
7607lisp_match(p)
7608 char_u *p;
7609{
7610 char_u buf[LSIZE];
7611 int len;
7612 char_u *word = p_lispwords;
7613
7614 while (*word != NUL)
7615 {
7616 (void)copy_option_part(&word, buf, LSIZE, ",");
7617 len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
7618 if (STRNCMP(buf, p, len) == 0 && p[len] == ' ')
7619 return TRUE;
7620 }
7621 return FALSE;
7622}
7623
7624/*
7625 * When 'p' is present in 'cpoptions, a Vi compatible method is used.
7626 * The incompatible newer method is quite a bit better at indenting
7627 * code in lisp-like languages than the traditional one; it's still
7628 * mostly heuristics however -- Dirk van Deun, dirk@rave.org
7629 *
7630 * TODO:
7631 * Findmatch() should be adapted for lisp, also to make showmatch
7632 * work correctly: now (v5.3) it seems all C/C++ oriented:
7633 * - it does not recognize the #\( and #\) notations as character literals
7634 * - it doesn't know about comments starting with a semicolon
7635 * - it incorrectly interprets '(' as a character literal
7636 * All this messes up get_lisp_indent in some rare cases.
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007637 * Update from Sergey Khorev:
7638 * I tried to fix the first two issues.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007639 */
7640 int
7641get_lisp_indent()
7642{
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007643 pos_T *pos, realpos, paren;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007644 int amount;
7645 char_u *that;
7646 colnr_T col;
7647 colnr_T firsttry;
7648 int parencount, quotecount;
7649 int vi_lisp;
7650
7651 /* Set vi_lisp to use the vi-compatible method */
7652 vi_lisp = (vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISP) != NULL);
7653
7654 realpos = curwin->w_cursor;
7655 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7656
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007657 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) == NULL)
7658 pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7659 else
7660 {
7661 paren = *pos;
7662 pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7663 if (pos == NULL || ltp(pos, &paren))
7664 pos = &paren;
7665 }
7666 if (pos != NULL)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007667 {
7668 /* Extra trick: Take the indent of the first previous non-white
7669 * line that is at the same () level. */
7670 amount = -1;
7671 parencount = 0;
7672
7673 while (--curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= pos->lnum)
7674 {
7675 if (linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7676 continue;
7677 for (that = ml_get_curline(); *that != NUL; ++that)
7678 {
7679 if (*that == ';')
7680 {
7681 while (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7682 ++that;
7683 continue;
7684 }
7685 if (*that == '\\')
7686 {
7687 if (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7688 ++that;
7689 continue;
7690 }
7691 if (*that == '"' && *(that + 1) != NUL)
7692 {
7693 that++;
7694 while (*that && (*that != '"' || *(that - 1) == '\\'))
7695 ++that;
7696 }
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007697 if (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007698 ++parencount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007699 else if (*that == ')' || *that == ']')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007700 --parencount;
7701 }
7702 if (parencount == 0)
7703 {
7704 amount = get_indent();
7705 break;
7706 }
7707 }
7708
7709 if (amount == -1)
7710 {
7711 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
7712 curwin->w_cursor.col = pos->col;
7713 col = pos->col;
7714
7715 that = ml_get_curline();
7716
7717 if (vi_lisp && get_indent() == 0)
7718 amount = 2;
7719 else
7720 {
7721 amount = 0;
7722 while (*that && col)
7723 {
7724 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, (colnr_T)amount);
7725 col--;
7726 }
7727
7728 /*
7729 * Some keywords require "body" indenting rules (the
7730 * non-standard-lisp ones are Scheme special forms):
7731 *
7732 * (let ((a 1)) instead (let ((a 1))
7733 * (...)) of (...))
7734 */
7735
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007736 if (!vi_lisp && (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7737 && lisp_match(that + 1))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007738 amount += 2;
7739 else
7740 {
7741 that++;
7742 amount++;
7743 firsttry = amount;
7744
7745 while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7746 {
7747 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7748 ++that;
7749 }
7750
7751 if (*that && *that != ';') /* not a comment line */
7752 {
7753 /* test *that != '(' to accomodate first let/do
7754 * argument if it is more than one line */
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007755 if (!vi_lisp && *that != '(' && *that != '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007756 firsttry++;
7757
7758 parencount = 0;
7759 quotecount = 0;
7760
7761 if (vi_lisp
7762 || (*that != '"'
7763 && *that != '\''
7764 && *that != '#'
7765 && (*that < '0' || *that > '9')))
7766 {
7767 while (*that
7768 && (!vim_iswhite(*that)
7769 || quotecount
7770 || parencount)
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007771 && (!((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007772 && !quotecount
7773 && !parencount
7774 && vi_lisp)))
7775 {
7776 if (*that == '"')
7777 quotecount = !quotecount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007778 if ((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7779 && !quotecount)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007780 ++parencount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007781 if ((*that == ')' || *that == ']')
7782 && !quotecount)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007783 --parencount;
7784 if (*that == '\\' && *(that+1) != NUL)
7785 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7786 (colnr_T)amount);
7787 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7788 (colnr_T)amount);
7789 }
7790 }
7791 while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7792 {
7793 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7794 that++;
7795 }
7796 if (!*that || *that == ';')
7797 amount = firsttry;
7798 }
7799 }
7800 }
7801 }
7802 }
7803 else
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007804 amount = 0; /* no matching '(' or '[' found, use zero indent */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007805
7806 curwin->w_cursor = realpos;
7807
7808 return amount;
7809}
7810#endif /* FEAT_LISP */
7811
7812 void
7813prepare_to_exit()
7814{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00007815#if defined(SIGHUP) && defined(SIG_IGN)
7816 /* Ignore SIGHUP, because a dropped connection causes a read error, which
7817 * makes Vim exit and then handling SIGHUP causes various reentrance
7818 * problems. */
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00007819 signal(SIGHUP, SIG_IGN);
7820#endif
7821
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007822#ifdef FEAT_GUI
7823 if (gui.in_use)
7824 {
7825 gui.dying = TRUE;
7826 out_trash(); /* trash any pending output */
7827 }
7828 else
7829#endif
7830 {
7831 windgoto((int)Rows - 1, 0);
7832
7833 /*
7834 * Switch terminal mode back now, so messages end up on the "normal"
7835 * screen (if there are two screens).
7836 */
7837 settmode(TMODE_COOK);
7838#ifdef WIN3264
7839 if (can_end_termcap_mode(FALSE) == TRUE)
7840#endif
7841 stoptermcap();
7842 out_flush();
7843 }
7844}
7845
7846/*
7847 * Preserve files and exit.
7848 * When called IObuff must contain a message.
7849 */
7850 void
7851preserve_exit()
7852{
7853 buf_T *buf;
7854
7855 prepare_to_exit();
7856
7857 out_str(IObuff);
7858 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */
7859 out_flush();
7860
7861 ml_close_notmod(); /* close all not-modified buffers */
7862
7863 for (buf = firstbuf; buf != NULL; buf = buf->b_next)
7864 {
7865 if (buf->b_ml.ml_mfp != NULL && buf->b_ml.ml_mfp->mf_fname != NULL)
7866 {
7867 OUT_STR(_("Vim: preserving files...\n"));
7868 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */
7869 out_flush();
7870 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */
7871 break;
7872 }
7873 }
7874
7875 ml_close_all(FALSE); /* close all memfiles, without deleting */
7876
7877 OUT_STR(_("Vim: Finished.\n"));
7878
7879 getout(1);
7880}
7881
7882/*
7883 * return TRUE if "fname" exists.
7884 */
7885 int
7886vim_fexists(fname)
7887 char_u *fname;
7888{
7889 struct stat st;
7890
7891 if (mch_stat((char *)fname, &st))
7892 return FALSE;
7893 return TRUE;
7894}
7895
7896/*
7897 * Check for CTRL-C pressed, but only once in a while.
7898 * Should be used instead of ui_breakcheck() for functions that check for
7899 * each line in the file. Calling ui_breakcheck() each time takes too much
7900 * time, because it can be a system call.
7901 */
7902
7903#ifndef BREAKCHECK_SKIP
7904# ifdef FEAT_GUI /* assume the GUI only runs on fast computers */
7905# define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 200
7906# else
7907# define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 32
7908# endif
7909#endif
7910
7911static int breakcheck_count = 0;
7912
7913 void
7914line_breakcheck()
7915{
7916 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP)
7917 {
7918 breakcheck_count = 0;
7919 ui_breakcheck();
7920 }
7921}
7922
7923/*
7924 * Like line_breakcheck() but check 10 times less often.
7925 */
7926 void
7927fast_breakcheck()
7928{
7929 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP * 10)
7930 {
7931 breakcheck_count = 0;
7932 ui_breakcheck();
7933 }
7934}
7935
7936/*
7937 * Expand wildcards. Calls gen_expand_wildcards() and removes files matching
7938 * 'wildignore'.
7939 */
7940 int
7941expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
7942 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */
7943 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */
7944 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */
7945 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */
7946 int flags; /* EW_DIR, etc. */
7947{
7948 int retval;
7949 int i, j;
7950 char_u *p;
7951 int non_suf_match; /* number without matching suffix */
7952
7953 retval = gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
7954
7955 /* When keeping all matches, return here */
7956 if (flags & EW_KEEPALL)
7957 return retval;
7958
7959#ifdef FEAT_WILDIGN
7960 /*
7961 * Remove names that match 'wildignore'.
7962 */
7963 if (*p_wig)
7964 {
7965 char_u *ffname;
7966
7967 /* check all files in (*file)[] */
7968 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
7969 {
7970 ffname = FullName_save((*file)[i], FALSE);
7971 if (ffname == NULL) /* out of memory */
7972 break;
7973# ifdef VMS
7974 vms_remove_version(ffname);
7975# endif
7976 if (match_file_list(p_wig, (*file)[i], ffname))
7977 {
7978 /* remove this matching file from the list */
7979 vim_free((*file)[i]);
7980 for (j = i; j + 1 < *num_file; ++j)
7981 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j + 1];
7982 --*num_file;
7983 --i;
7984 }
7985 vim_free(ffname);
7986 }
7987 }
7988#endif
7989
7990 /*
7991 * Move the names where 'suffixes' match to the end.
7992 */
7993 if (*num_file > 1)
7994 {
7995 non_suf_match = 0;
7996 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
7997 {
7998 if (!match_suffix((*file)[i]))
7999 {
8000 /*
8001 * Move the name without matching suffix to the front
8002 * of the list.
8003 */
8004 p = (*file)[i];
8005 for (j = i; j > non_suf_match; --j)
8006 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j - 1];
8007 (*file)[non_suf_match++] = p;
8008 }
8009 }
8010 }
8011
8012 return retval;
8013}
8014
8015/*
8016 * Return TRUE if "fname" matches with an entry in 'suffixes'.
8017 */
8018 int
8019match_suffix(fname)
8020 char_u *fname;
8021{
8022 int fnamelen, setsuflen;
8023 char_u *setsuf;
8024#define MAXSUFLEN 30 /* maximum length of a file suffix */
8025 char_u suf_buf[MAXSUFLEN];
8026
8027 fnamelen = (int)STRLEN(fname);
8028 setsuflen = 0;
8029 for (setsuf = p_su; *setsuf; )
8030 {
8031 setsuflen = copy_option_part(&setsuf, suf_buf, MAXSUFLEN, ".,");
8032 if (fnamelen >= setsuflen
8033 && fnamencmp(suf_buf, fname + fnamelen - setsuflen,
8034 (size_t)setsuflen) == 0)
8035 break;
8036 setsuflen = 0;
8037 }
8038 return (setsuflen != 0);
8039}
8040
8041#if !defined(NO_EXPANDPATH) || defined(PROTO)
8042
8043# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8044static int vim_backtick __ARGS((char_u *p));
8045static int expand_backtick __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pat, int flags));
8046# endif
8047
8048# if defined(MSDOS) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W16) || defined(WIN3264)
8049/*
8050 * File name expansion code for MS-DOS, Win16 and Win32. It's here because
8051 * it's shared between these systems.
8052 */
8053# if defined(DJGPP) || defined(PROTO)
8054# define _cdecl /* DJGPP doesn't have this */
8055# else
8056# ifdef __BORLANDC__
8057# define _cdecl _RTLENTRYF
8058# endif
8059# endif
8060
8061/*
8062 * comparison function for qsort in dos_expandpath()
8063 */
8064 static int _cdecl
8065pstrcmp(const void *a, const void *b)
8066{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00008067 return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008068}
8069
8070# ifndef WIN3264
8071 static void
8072namelowcpy(
8073 char_u *d,
8074 char_u *s)
8075{
8076# ifdef DJGPP
8077 if (USE_LONG_FNAME) /* don't lower case on Windows 95/NT systems */
8078 while (*s)
8079 *d++ = *s++;
8080 else
8081# endif
8082 while (*s)
8083 *d++ = TOLOWER_LOC(*s++);
8084 *d = NUL;
8085}
8086# endif
8087
8088/*
8089 * Recursively build up a list of files in "gap" matching the first wildcard
8090 * in `path'. Called by expand_wildcards().
8091 * Return the number of matches found.
8092 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
8093 * at "path[wildoff]".
8094 */
8095 static int
8096dos_expandpath(
8097 garray_T *gap,
8098 char_u *path,
8099 int wildoff,
8100 int flags) /* EW_* flags */
8101{
8102 char_u *buf;
8103 char_u *path_end;
8104 char_u *p, *s, *e;
8105 int start_len = gap->ga_len;
8106 int ok;
8107#ifdef WIN3264
8108 WIN32_FIND_DATA fb;
8109 HANDLE hFind = (HANDLE)0;
8110# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8111 WIN32_FIND_DATAW wfb;
8112 WCHAR *wn = NULL; /* UCS-2 name, NULL when not used. */
8113# endif
8114#else
8115 struct ffblk fb;
8116#endif
8117 int matches;
8118 int starts_with_dot;
8119 int len;
8120 char_u *pat;
8121 regmatch_T regmatch;
8122 char_u *matchname;
8123
8124 /* make room for file name */
8125 buf = alloc((unsigned int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
8126 if (buf == NULL)
8127 return 0;
8128
8129 /*
8130 * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard or a ~1.
8131 * Copy it into buf, including the preceding characters.
8132 */
8133 p = buf;
8134 s = buf;
8135 e = NULL;
8136 path_end = path;
8137 while (*path_end != NUL)
8138 {
8139 /* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
8140 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
8141 if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
8142 *p++ = *path_end++;
8143 else if (*path_end == '\\' || *path_end == ':' || *path_end == '/')
8144 {
8145 if (e != NULL)
8146 break;
8147 s = p + 1;
8148 }
8149 else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
8150 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[~", *path_end) != NULL)
8151 e = p;
8152#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8153 if (has_mbyte)
8154 {
8155 len = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(path_end);
8156 STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
8157 p += len;
8158 path_end += len;
8159 }
8160 else
8161#endif
8162 *p++ = *path_end++;
8163 }
8164 e = p;
8165 *e = NUL;
8166
8167 /* now we have one wildcard component between s and e */
8168 /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
8169 * component. */
8170 for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
8171 if (rem_backslash(p))
8172 {
8173 STRCPY(p, p + 1);
8174 --e;
8175 --s;
8176 }
8177
8178 starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
8179 pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
8180 if (pat == NULL)
8181 {
8182 vim_free(buf);
8183 return 0;
8184 }
8185
8186 /* compile the regexp into a program */
8187 regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE; /* Always ignore case */
8188 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
8189 vim_free(pat);
8190
8191 if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
8192 {
8193 vim_free(buf);
8194 return 0;
8195 }
8196
8197 /* remember the pattern or file name being looked for */
8198 matchname = vim_strsave(s);
8199
8200 /* Scan all files in the directory with "dir/ *.*" */
8201 STRCPY(s, "*.*");
8202#ifdef WIN3264
8203# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8204 if (enc_codepage >= 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage)
8205 {
8206 /* The active codepage differs from 'encoding'. Attempt using the
8207 * wide function. If it fails because it is not implemented fall back
8208 * to the non-wide version (for Windows 98) */
8209 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8210 if (wn != NULL)
8211 {
8212 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8213 if (hFind == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE
8214 && GetLastError() == ERROR_CALL_NOT_IMPLEMENTED)
8215 {
8216 vim_free(wn);
8217 wn = NULL;
8218 }
8219 }
8220 }
8221
8222 if (wn == NULL)
8223# endif
8224 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8225 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8226#else
8227 /* If we are expanding wildcards we try both files and directories */
8228 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8229 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8230#endif
8231
8232 while (ok)
8233 {
8234#ifdef WIN3264
8235# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8236 if (wn != NULL)
8237 p = ucs2_to_enc(wfb.cFileName, NULL); /* p is allocated here */
8238 else
8239# endif
8240 p = (char_u *)fb.cFileName;
8241#else
8242 p = (char_u *)fb.ff_name;
8243#endif
8244 /* Ignore entries starting with a dot, unless when asked for. Accept
8245 * all entries found with "matchname". */
8246 if ((p[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
8247 && (matchname == NULL
8248 || vim_regexec(&regmatch, p, (colnr_T)0)))
8249 {
8250#ifdef WIN3264
8251 STRCPY(s, p);
8252#else
8253 namelowcpy(s, p);
8254#endif
8255 len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
8256 STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
8257 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end))
8258 {
8259 /* need to expand another component of the path */
8260 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8261 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags);
8262 }
8263 else
8264 {
8265 /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
8266 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8267 if (*path_end != 0)
8268 backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
8269 if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0) /* add existing file */
8270 addfile(gap, buf, flags);
8271 }
8272 }
8273
8274#ifdef WIN3264
8275# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8276 if (wn != NULL)
8277 {
8278 vim_free(p);
8279 ok = FindNextFileW(hFind, &wfb);
8280 }
8281 else
8282# endif
8283 ok = FindNextFile(hFind, &fb);
8284#else
8285 ok = (findnext(&fb) == 0);
8286#endif
8287
8288 /* If no more matches and no match was used, try expanding the name
8289 * itself. Finds the long name of a short filename. */
8290 if (!ok && matchname != NULL && gap->ga_len == start_len)
8291 {
8292 STRCPY(s, matchname);
8293#ifdef WIN3264
8294 FindClose(hFind);
8295# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8296 if (wn != NULL)
8297 {
8298 vim_free(wn);
8299 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8300 if (wn != NULL)
8301 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8302 }
8303 if (wn == NULL)
8304# endif
8305 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8306 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8307#else
8308 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8309 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8310#endif
8311 vim_free(matchname);
8312 matchname = NULL;
8313 }
8314 }
8315
8316#ifdef WIN3264
8317 FindClose(hFind);
8318# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8319 vim_free(wn);
8320# endif
8321#endif
8322 vim_free(buf);
8323 vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
8324 vim_free(matchname);
8325
8326 matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
8327 if (matches > 0)
8328 qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, (size_t)matches,
8329 sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
8330 return matches;
8331}
8332
8333 int
8334mch_expandpath(
8335 garray_T *gap,
8336 char_u *path,
8337 int flags) /* EW_* flags */
8338{
8339 return dos_expandpath(gap, path, 0, flags);
8340}
8341# endif /* MSDOS || FEAT_GUI_W16 || WIN3264 */
8342
8343/*
8344 * Generic wildcard expansion code.
8345 *
8346 * Characters in "pat" that should not be expanded must be preceded with a
8347 * backslash. E.g., "/path\ with\ spaces/my\*star*"
8348 *
8349 * Return FAIL when no single file was found. In this case "num_file" is not
8350 * set, and "file" may contain an error message.
8351 * Return OK when some files found. "num_file" is set to the number of
8352 * matches, "file" to the array of matches. Call FreeWild() later.
8353 */
8354 int
8355gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
8356 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */
8357 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */
8358 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */
8359 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */
8360 int flags; /* EW_* flags */
8361{
8362 int i;
8363 garray_T ga;
8364 char_u *p;
8365 static int recursive = FALSE;
8366 int add_pat;
8367
8368 /*
8369 * expand_env() is called to expand things like "~user". If this fails,
8370 * it calls ExpandOne(), which brings us back here. In this case, always
8371 * call the machine specific expansion function, if possible. Otherwise,
8372 * return FAIL.
8373 */
8374 if (recursive)
8375#ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8376 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8377#else
8378 return FAIL;
8379#endif
8380
8381#ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8382 /*
8383 * If there are any special wildcard characters which we cannot handle
8384 * here, call machine specific function for all the expansion. This
8385 * avoids starting the shell for each argument separately.
8386 * For `=expr` do use the internal function.
8387 */
8388 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; i++)
8389 {
8390 if (vim_strpbrk(pat[i], (char_u *)SPECIAL_WILDCHAR) != NULL
8391# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8392 && !(vim_backtick(pat[i]) && pat[i][1] == '=')
8393# endif
8394 )
8395 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8396 }
8397#endif
8398
8399 recursive = TRUE;
8400
8401 /*
8402 * The matching file names are stored in a growarray. Init it empty.
8403 */
8404 ga_init2(&ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 30);
8405
8406 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; ++i)
8407 {
8408 add_pat = -1;
8409 p = pat[i];
8410
8411#ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8412 if (vim_backtick(p))
8413 add_pat = expand_backtick(&ga, p, flags);
8414 else
8415#endif
8416 {
8417 /*
8418 * First expand environment variables, "~/" and "~user/".
8419 */
8420 if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8421 {
8422 p = expand_env_save(p);
8423 if (p == NULL)
8424 p = pat[i];
8425#ifdef UNIX
8426 /*
8427 * On Unix, if expand_env() can't expand an environment
8428 * variable, use the shell to do that. Discard previously
8429 * found file names and start all over again.
8430 */
8431 else if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8432 {
8433 vim_free(p);
8434 ga_clear(&ga);
8435 i = mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file,
8436 flags);
8437 recursive = FALSE;
8438 return i;
8439 }
8440#endif
8441 }
8442
8443 /*
8444 * If there are wildcards: Expand file names and add each match to
8445 * the list. If there is no match, and EW_NOTFOUND is given, add
8446 * the pattern.
8447 * If there are no wildcards: Add the file name if it exists or
8448 * when EW_NOTFOUND is given.
8449 */
8450 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(p))
8451 add_pat = mch_expandpath(&ga, p, flags);
8452 }
8453
8454 if (add_pat == -1 || (add_pat == 0 && (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)))
8455 {
8456 char_u *t = backslash_halve_save(p);
8457
8458#if defined(MACOS_CLASSIC)
8459 slash_to_colon(t);
8460#endif
8461 /* When EW_NOTFOUND is used, always add files and dirs. Makes
8462 * "vim c:/" work. */
8463 if (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)
8464 addfile(&ga, t, flags | EW_DIR | EW_FILE);
8465 else if (mch_getperm(t) >= 0)
8466 addfile(&ga, t, flags);
8467 vim_free(t);
8468 }
8469
8470 if (p != pat[i])
8471 vim_free(p);
8472 }
8473
8474 *num_file = ga.ga_len;
8475 *file = (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? (char_u **)ga.ga_data : (char_u **)"";
8476
8477 recursive = FALSE;
8478
8479 return (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? OK : FAIL;
8480}
8481
8482# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8483
8484/*
8485 * Return TRUE if we can expand this backtick thing here.
8486 */
8487 static int
8488vim_backtick(p)
8489 char_u *p;
8490{
8491 return (*p == '`' && *(p + 1) != NUL && *(p + STRLEN(p) - 1) == '`');
8492}
8493
8494/*
8495 * Expand an item in `backticks` by executing it as a command.
8496 * Currently only works when pat[] starts and ends with a `.
8497 * Returns number of file names found.
8498 */
8499 static int
8500expand_backtick(gap, pat, flags)
8501 garray_T *gap;
8502 char_u *pat;
8503 int flags; /* EW_* flags */
8504{
8505 char_u *p;
8506 char_u *cmd;
8507 char_u *buffer;
8508 int cnt = 0;
8509 int i;
8510
8511 /* Create the command: lop off the backticks. */
8512 cmd = vim_strnsave(pat + 1, (int)STRLEN(pat) - 2);
8513 if (cmd == NULL)
8514 return 0;
8515
8516#ifdef FEAT_EVAL
8517 if (*cmd == '=') /* `={expr}`: Expand expression */
8518 buffer = eval_to_string(cmd + 1, &p);
8519 else
8520#endif
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008521 buffer = get_cmd_output(cmd, NULL,
8522 (flags & EW_SILENT) ? SHELL_SILENT : 0);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008523 vim_free(cmd);
8524 if (buffer == NULL)
8525 return 0;
8526
8527 cmd = buffer;
8528 while (*cmd != NUL)
8529 {
8530 cmd = skipwhite(cmd); /* skip over white space */
8531 p = cmd;
8532 while (*p != NUL && *p != '\r' && *p != '\n') /* skip over entry */
8533 ++p;
8534 /* add an entry if it is not empty */
8535 if (p > cmd)
8536 {
8537 i = *p;
8538 *p = NUL;
8539 addfile(gap, cmd, flags);
8540 *p = i;
8541 ++cnt;
8542 }
8543 cmd = p;
8544 while (*cmd != NUL && (*cmd == '\r' || *cmd == '\n'))
8545 ++cmd;
8546 }
8547
8548 vim_free(buffer);
8549 return cnt;
8550}
8551# endif /* VIM_BACKTICK */
8552
8553/*
8554 * Add a file to a file list. Accepted flags:
8555 * EW_DIR add directories
8556 * EW_FILE add files
8557 * EW_NOTFOUND add even when it doesn't exist
8558 * EW_ADDSLASH add slash after directory name
8559 */
8560 void
8561addfile(gap, f, flags)
8562 garray_T *gap;
8563 char_u *f; /* filename */
8564 int flags;
8565{
8566 char_u *p;
8567 int isdir;
8568
8569 /* if the file/dir doesn't exist, may not add it */
8570 if (!(flags & EW_NOTFOUND) && mch_getperm(f) < 0)
8571 return;
8572
8573#ifdef FNAME_ILLEGAL
8574 /* if the file/dir contains illegal characters, don't add it */
8575 if (vim_strpbrk(f, (char_u *)FNAME_ILLEGAL) != NULL)
8576 return;
8577#endif
8578
8579 isdir = mch_isdir(f);
8580 if ((isdir && !(flags & EW_DIR)) || (!isdir && !(flags & EW_FILE)))
8581 return;
8582
8583 /* Make room for another item in the file list. */
8584 if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL)
8585 return;
8586
8587 p = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(f) + 1 + isdir));
8588 if (p == NULL)
8589 return;
8590
8591 STRCPY(p, f);
8592#ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
8593 slash_adjust(p);
8594#endif
8595 /*
8596 * Append a slash or backslash after directory names if none is present.
8597 */
8598#ifndef DONT_ADD_PATHSEP_TO_DIR
8599 if (isdir && (flags & EW_ADDSLASH))
8600 add_pathsep(p);
8601#endif
8602 ((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008603}
8604#endif /* !NO_EXPANDPATH */
8605
8606#if defined(VIM_BACKTICK) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
8607
8608#ifndef SEEK_SET
8609# define SEEK_SET 0
8610#endif
8611#ifndef SEEK_END
8612# define SEEK_END 2
8613#endif
8614
8615/*
8616 * Get the stdout of an external command.
8617 * Returns an allocated string, or NULL for error.
8618 */
8619 char_u *
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008620get_cmd_output(cmd, infile, flags)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008621 char_u *cmd;
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008622 char_u *infile; /* optional input file name */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008623 int flags; /* can be SHELL_SILENT */
8624{
8625 char_u *tempname;
8626 char_u *command;
8627 char_u *buffer = NULL;
8628 int len;
8629 int i = 0;
8630 FILE *fd;
8631
8632 if (check_restricted() || check_secure())
8633 return NULL;
8634
8635 /* get a name for the temp file */
8636 if ((tempname = vim_tempname('o')) == NULL)
8637 {
8638 EMSG(_(e_notmp));
8639 return NULL;
8640 }
8641
8642 /* Add the redirection stuff */
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008643 command = make_filter_cmd(cmd, infile, tempname);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008644 if (command == NULL)
8645 goto done;
8646
8647 /*
8648 * Call the shell to execute the command (errors are ignored).
8649 * Don't check timestamps here.
8650 */
8651 ++no_check_timestamps;
8652 call_shell(command, SHELL_DOOUT | SHELL_EXPAND | flags);
8653 --no_check_timestamps;
8654
8655 vim_free(command);
8656
8657 /*
8658 * read the names from the file into memory
8659 */
8660# ifdef VMS
8661 /* created temporary file is not allways readable as binary */
8662 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, "r");
8663# else
8664 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, READBIN);
8665# endif
8666
8667 if (fd == NULL)
8668 {
8669 EMSG2(_(e_notopen), tempname);
8670 goto done;
8671 }
8672
8673 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_END);
8674 len = ftell(fd); /* get size of temp file */
8675 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_SET);
8676
8677 buffer = alloc(len + 1);
8678 if (buffer != NULL)
8679 i = (int)fread((char *)buffer, (size_t)1, (size_t)len, fd);
8680 fclose(fd);
8681 mch_remove(tempname);
8682 if (buffer == NULL)
8683 goto done;
8684#ifdef VMS
8685 len = i; /* VMS doesn't give us what we asked for... */
8686#endif
8687 if (i != len)
8688 {
8689 EMSG2(_(e_notread), tempname);
8690 vim_free(buffer);
8691 buffer = NULL;
8692 }
8693 else
8694 buffer[len] = '\0'; /* make sure the buffer is terminated */
8695
8696done:
8697 vim_free(tempname);
8698 return buffer;
8699}
8700#endif
8701
8702/*
8703 * Free the list of files returned by expand_wildcards() or other expansion
8704 * functions.
8705 */
8706 void
8707FreeWild(count, files)
8708 int count;
8709 char_u **files;
8710{
8711 if (files == NULL || count <= 0)
8712 return;
8713#if defined(__EMX__) && defined(__ALWAYS_HAS_TRAILING_NULL_POINTER) /* XXX */
8714 /*
8715 * Is this still OK for when other functions than expand_wildcards() have
8716 * been used???
8717 */
8718 _fnexplodefree((char **)files);
8719#else
8720 while (count--)
8721 vim_free(files[count]);
8722 vim_free(files);
8723#endif
8724}
8725
8726/*
8727 * return TRUE when need to go to Insert mode because of 'insertmode'.
8728 * Don't do this when still processing a command or a mapping.
8729 * Don't do this when inside a ":normal" command.
8730 */
8731 int
8732goto_im()
8733{
8734 return (p_im && stuff_empty() && typebuf_typed());
8735}